Page 1 ® R&S Vector Network Analyzers User Manual (;ÜÎÌ2) 1178646202 Version 16...
Page 2 ZNA vector network analyzer models: ● ® R&S ZNA26, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, 2 test ports, 3.5 mm (m) connectors, order no. 1332.4500.22 ● ® R&S ZNA26, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, 4 test ports, 3.5 mm (m) connectors, order no. 1332.4500.24 ●...
Page 3 ® Preface R&S Documentation Overview 1 Preface This chapter provides safety-related information, an overview of the user documenta- tion and the conventions used in the documentation. 1.1 Documentation Overview This section provides an overview of the R&S ZNA user documentation. Unless speci- fied otherwise, you find the documents on the R&S ZNA product page at: https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/ZNA 1.1.1 Getting Started Manual...
Page 4 ® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.1.4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ZNA in secure areas. It is avail- able for download on the Internet. 1.1.5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information. The printed document is delivered with the instrument.
Page 5 ® Preface R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description [Keys] Key and knob names are enclosed by square brackets. This also applies to the virtual keys in the control window of the R&S ZNA. "Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as ments"...
Page 6 ® Safety Information R&S 2 Safety Information The product documentation helps you use the R&S ZNA safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the printed "Basic Safety Instructions". Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users. Intended use The R&S ZNA is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
Page 7 New hardware option R&S ZNAxx-B302: low noise preamplifier for port 2 of a R&S ZNAxx, up to 30 dB power gain at receiver side. Only available for R&S ZNA26 and R&S ZNA43. Requires hardware option R&S ZNAxx-B32 (receiver step attenuator at port 2).
Page 8 ® Firmware Version 2.21 R&S Changes in Firmware V2.20 Chapter 6.17.2.2, "TDR Wizard", on page 682 ● Touchstone file export of balanced S-parameter traces "Balanced Params" on page 390 ● Support of R&S VSE software with option R&S ZNA-K7 "Pulsed Measurements" –...
Page 9 ® Firmware Version 2.21 R&S Changes in Firmware V2.20 "Compression Point Power In / Compression Point Power Out / Compres- sion Point S-Param" on page 313 – Load match correction of "Compression Point Power Out" ● R&S ZNA-K50(P): GUI terms adjusted to METAS VNA tools ●...
Page 10 ® Firmware Version 2.21 R&S Changes in Firmware V2.20 ● Command SENSe<Ch>:SWEep:TYPE POINt did not always switch from segmen- ted to CW sweep mode ● Fixed an issue with reusing reference receiver calibrations in subsequent calibra- tions ● A positive/negative ALC offset ("Start Value: Offset") decreased/increased the start power Note that the offset direction has been reversed.
Page 11 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4 Getting Started 4.1 Putting the Analyzer into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the analyzer for the first time. Simple measurement examples are provided in Chapter 4.4, "Performing Measure- ments", on page 56;...
Page 12 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.2 Positioning the Instrument The network analyzer is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench top or in a rack. Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrument and connected devices.
Page 13 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation Risk of injury if feet are folded out The feet can fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted. Collapsing feet can cause injury or damage the instrument. ●...
Page 14 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation Regarding length and quality, the following requirements have to be met for cable that are directly connected to the R&S ZNA: Table 4-1: Cable Requirements Cable Type (Connector) Requirement RF cables (PORT 1, ..., PORT N) Double shielded BNC cables (various) Double shielded...
Page 15 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation After power-on, the analyzer automatically goes to standby or ready state, depend- ing on the state of the standby toggle key at the front panel when the instrument was switched off last time. 2.
Page 16 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation Observe the instructions for startup and shutdown in Chapter 4.1.7, "Starting the Ana- lyzer and Shutting Down", on page 14. 4.1.9 Connecting External Accessories The analyzer's standard PC interfaces (Monitor, USB, LAN) can be used to connect various accessories: ●...
Page 17 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation ® To access Windows , use the button in the toolbar of the application window. 4.1.9.3 Connecting a Mouse A USB mouse can be connected to any of the USB connectors. After being auto-detec- ted by the operating system, it can safely be disconnected and reconnected even dur- ing measurements.
Page 18 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.9.5 Connecting a LAN Cable A LAN cable can be connected to the LAN connector on the rear panel of the analyzer. To establish a LAN connection, proceed as follows: 1. Refer to Chapter 11.1.3.1, "Assigning an IP Address", on page 1537.
Page 19 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour A software update restores the original shortcut properties. 4.2 Instrument Tour This chapter gives an overview of the control elements and connectors of the R&S ZNA and gives all information that is necessary to put the instrument into opera- tion and connect external devices.
Page 20 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 4.2.1.1 Touchscreen The touchscreen is split into two parts: the application window with diagrams and soft- tools on the left, and the control window with its (virtual) function keys and data entry controls on the right. User interaction is touch-only, i.e. all hardkeys commonly used in Rohde &...
Page 21 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Application Window Control Window Function Keys Data Entry Panel Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system can be used to switch off the display if the analyzer receives no command for a selectable period of time. The display is switched on again when the touchscreen is touched.
Page 22 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The Trace keys give access to all trace settings, to the limit check settings, and to the marker functions including marker search. ● [Meas]: select the measured and displayed quantity. ● [Format]: define how measured data (traces) are presented. ●...
Page 23 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour ● [Preset]: restores preset values. Control Window: Data Entry Panel The controls in the data entry panel are used to enter numbers, units, and characters. The appearance of the panel depends on the data type of the setting selected in the Application Window.
Page 24 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour – Yellow, flashing: the R&S ZNA is configured for external synchronization, but cannot lock on the external reference clock. ● Cal. Indicates the calibration state of the active setup. – Off: none of the traces (in the active setup) has a valid calibration –...
Page 25 The test ports and three USB connectors are located on the front panel of the R&S ZNA. Test Ports Numbered connectors: ● 3.5 mm male for R&S ZNA26 ● 2.92 mm (K) or 2.4 mm male for R&S ZNA43 ● 2.4 mm male for R&S ZNA50 ●...
Page 26 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour ● The Meas Out signal comes from the coupler and provides the received signal (to be measured). The Meas In signal goes to the receiver input for the measured sig- nal. Meas. Receiver Meas Out Ref.
Page 27 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Table 4-2: Rear panel elements available on all instruments Index Label Description System Drive Removable system drive of the R&S ZNA, containing all software (including the operating system and the VNA application) and data. No other drive is built in. Do not remove the system drive during operation.
Page 28 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Index Label Description External Handler IO Used to connect an external Handler I/O (option R&S ZNBT-Z14), providing a Centronics 36 input/output connector. Not yet supported. External Data Logger Digital interface for data streaming. Requires "Data Streaming Memory" option R&S ZNA-B7 (not yet available). SMA connector for external reference clock input or output.
Page 29 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3 Operating the Instrument The following sections describe the basics of manual operation, i.e. how to access instrument functions and settings via the analyzer GUI. Manual operation is particularly useful for getting to know the instrument and for trouble shooting. Manual and remote control of the instrument Manual control of the R&S ZNA is possible either via its touchscreen (without using a mouse and/or keyboard), via locally connected monitor + mouse + keyboard (see...
Page 30 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Using the Touchscreen To access an instrument function: 1. Press a (virtual) key, e.g. the [Meas] key in the Trace section. The corresponding softtool expands at the current docking position. 2. Make sure the "S-Params" radio button is selected. 3.
Page 31 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4. Select a control element, e.g. "a1 Src Port 1". The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity. A control element with three dots (e.g. System – [Setup] > "Setup" > "System Con- fig...") opens a dialog, containing a group of related settings, a wizard or additional information.
Page 32 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Using the menu bar The menu bar at the bottom of the application screen provides alternative access to all instrument functions. To repeat the measured quantity selection described above, ► Select Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" > "Wave" > "a1 Src Port 1". The diagram immediately reflects your selection.
Page 33 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Select "a1 Src Port 2". 4.3.2 Control Elements of the Application Window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
Page 34 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument These methods are described in more detail in the following sections. For further reference: ● Refer to Chapter 5.2.1, "Display Elements of a Diagram", on page 79 to obtain information about the results in the diagram. ●...
Page 35 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The toolbar is divided into several icon groups, separated by vertical lines. These icons represent the undo and redo actions that are also available via the menu bar items "System" > "Undo" / "Redo". Undo reverses the last action, redo reverses the last undo action (if possi- ble).
Page 36 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.2.3 Softtools Softtools display groups of related settings as a tabbed panel. They can be opened via function keys, or via menu bar and context menu items. Figure 4-4: Scale softtool A softtool is a tabbed panel with a close icon. When the softtool is closed, the close icon is replaced by a "hamburger"...
Page 37 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Overview of menu functions ● The "File" menu provides functions to handle recall sets and trace files, to print or save diagram content, and to shut down the VNA application. ● The "Trace" menu provides all trace settings, the limit check settings, and the marker functions including marker search.
Page 38 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument ● A menu command with three dots appended calls up a dialog providing several related settings. Example: "Search Range" opens a dialog to define the search range for the marker search. ● A menu command with no arrow or dots initiates an immediate action. Example: "Max"...
Page 39 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument ● Select "Hard Key" from the context menu of the softtool panel. 4.3.2.7 Status Bar The status bar shows ● the active channel ● the current channel's sweep averaging counter (e.g. "Ch: Avg 9/10"), or "Ch: Avg None"...
Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 4-6: Tapping Double-tapping Tap the screen twice, in quick succession. Double-tap a diagram to maximize it or to restore its original size. Dragging Move your finger from one position to another on the display, keeping your finger on the display the whole time.
Page 41 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 4-8: Pinching While "Zoom Select" is active (toolbar icon or softtool button is toggled on), spread- ing and pinching is disabled. You can only select a rectangular area (using one fin- ger) then. ●...
Page 42 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.4 Working with Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way. The settings are visualized, if possible. An example is shown below. All dialogs are operated in a similar way.
Page 43 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.5 Handling Diagrams, Traces, and Markers The analyzer displays measurement results as traces in rectangular diagrams. Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace.
Page 44 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 3. In the dialog box that is opened when you release the "New Trace" icon, select the S-parameter to be measured. For a four-port analyzer: The R&S ZNA generates a new trace for the selected S-parameter. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 45 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select Trace – [Meas]. Drag and drop a softkey repre- senting a measured quantity to create a trace. Or simply select another softkey to change the measured quantity of the active trace. Select Trace –...
Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Active trace, alternative control elements The trace line of the active trace in the upper part of the diagram is highlighted. If the diagram contains several traces, first activate the target trace, then add the marker. The Trace –...
Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Screen element Action Drag and drop... Delete Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Deleting Display Elements", on page 46 Trace Create Chapter 4.3.5.1, "Adding New Traces and Diagrams", on page 43 Move vertically Reference line marker (right diagram edge) Move into other or new Trace line diagram...
Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument "Control Window: Data Entry Panel" on page 23. In single-window mode (System – [Display] > "Config" > "Single Window Mode") only the application window is shown, with its virtual Hardkey Panel enabled. The values can be edited in place, either using an external keyboard or by calling the VNA's numeric editor or on-screen keyboard (see Chapter 4.3.6.2, "Using the Numeric Edi-...
Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Use the buttons in the numeric keypad to compose the numeric input value. 3. If desired, select a "Step Size" and use the cursor up/down buttons to increment/ decrement the current value. If a marker is active, you can also set the numeric value to the current marker value ("Set to Marker").
Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument For the following procedure, we assume single-window mode. 1. Activate a character data input field in a softtool or a dialog. 2. Double-tap/click the input field to open the on-screen keyboard. 3. Select character buttons to compose the input string. 4.
Page 51 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Select "External Tools" 3. Select "Screen Keyboard". 4.3.7 Scaling Diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range. Choose the method that is most convenient for you. 4.3.7.1 Using the Graphical Zoom The graphical zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram (zoom win-...
Page 52 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument The zoomed view shows the selected rectangle, scaled in both horizontal and verti- cal direction. In general, the zoom window covers only a part of the sweep range; the horizontal distance between the sweep points increases. The reduced display range is indicated in an additional zoom line in the channel info area.
Page 53 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.7.2 Setting the Sweep Range The sweep range for all related channels is displayed in the channel info area at the bottom of each diagram: To change the sweep range of the active channel, use one of the following methods: ●...
Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.7.4 Auto Scale The "Auto Scale" function adjusts the scale divisions and the reference value so that the entire trace fits into the diagram. To access "Auto Scale", use one of the following methods: ●...
Page 55 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To set the sweep range using markers, use one of the following methods. Set "Start" and "Stop" values in the diagram: 1. Create two normal markers, e.g. the markers "Mkr 1" (default label "M1") and "Mkr 2"...
Page 56 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements Marker" to move the trace towards the lower diagram edge, or select "Ref Val = Marker" to move the trace towards the "Ref Value". You can also use marker values in the "Numeric Editor"; see Chapter 4.3.6.2, "Using the Numeric Editor",...
Page 57 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements 4.4.1.1 Connecting the Instrument for Transmission Measurements To prepare a transmission measurement, you have to connect your DUT (which for simplicity we assume to have appropriate connectors) in-between a pair of analyzer test ports. It is recommended that you preset the R&S ZNA to start from a well-defined instrument state.
Page 58 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements Select Trace – [Trace Config] and use the control elements in the "Traces" softtool tab if you wish to create additional traces and diagrams. 4.4.1.2 Selecting the Sweep Range and Other Parameters After a system preset the display shows a diagram with a dB magnitude scale, and the S-parameter S is selected as a measured quantity.
Page 59 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements phase shift of the waves. Both effects impair the accuracy of the S-parameter mea- surement. The analyzer provides a wide range of sophisticated calibration methods for all types of measurements. The calibration method to select depends on the expected system errors, the accuracy requirements of the measurement, on the test setup and on the types of calibration standards available.
Page 60 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements 6. Select "OK" to apply your settings and return to the calibration setup dialog "Cali- bration Setting" wizard. 7. Select the test port connector type and gender (here: N 50 Ω, female, correspond- ing to a male Through standard), and the calibration kit (here: R&S ZV-Z121). 8.
Page 61 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements The analyzer performs a calibration sweep for the measured quantity S . The magnitude and phase of the result is displayed in two diagrams, together with the expected typical result for a Through standard. The similarity of real and expected traces indicates that the Through standard has been properly connected.
Page 62 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements 2. Select Trace – [Marker], activate the "Marker Search" softtool tab and activate "Min" search. The marker jumps to the absolute minimum of the curve in the entire sweep range. The marker info field shows the coordinates of the new marker position. 3.
Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements Data transfer is made easier if external accessories are connected to the analyzer or if the instrument is integrated into a LAN. Refer to Chapter 4.1.9, "Connecting External Accessories", on page 16, and Chapter 11.1.3, "Remote Operation in a LAN", on page 1537 to obtain information about the necessary steps.
Page 64 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements You can also use the basic transmission test setup, e.g. if you want to measure reflection and transmission parameters in parallel. ● The analyzer provides special calibration types for reflection measurements. Use the calibration wizard and select an appropriate type. A full n-port calibration (TOSM, UOSM, TNA ...) corrects the system errors for all transmission and reflection S-parameters.
Page 65 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts 5 Concepts and Features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data. Also included are descriptions of the screen con- tents, possible measured quantities, calibration methods and typical test setups.
Page 66 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts ● Cal pool data including system error correction and power correction data ● Directories for trace data, limit lines, calibration data etc. ● Color schemes and printer settings ● System configurations, to be accessed via System – [Setup]. ●...
Page 67 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts 5.1.3.1 Trace Settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...) ●...
Page 68 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace. If a previ- ously inactive area is selected as the active area, the trace that was active last time when the area was active again becomes the active trace.
Page 69 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity, the ana- lyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep. This preparation period increases with the number of points and the number of partial measurements involved. It indica- ted in the status bar: All analyzer settings can still be changed during sweep initialization.
Page 70 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts Use the "Alternated" mode to increase the accuracy of measurements on DUTs with long level settling times (e.g. quartzes, SAW filters). To measure DUTs with short set- tling times and obtain a trace from the beginning of the sweep, use "Chopped" mode. In "Auto"...
Page 71 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts Parallel Measurements with Frequency Offset When performing parallel measurements, it is possible to specify a minimum frequency offset between the port groups. This is particularly useful for situations where "Cross- talk" between different DUTs would otherwise make the simultaneous measurement impossible (e.g.
Page 72 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts Sweep type [Start](unit) [Stop] (unit) [Center] (unit) [Span] (unit) "Power" "Start Power" (dBm) "Stop Power" (dBm) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Mode" "CW Frequency" (Hz) "Number of Points" (-) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Frequency"...
Page 73 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts Both "Imb Start Phase" and "Imb Stop Phase" must be in the range between -180° dBm and 180°. The analyzer generates a balanced signal with configurable fre- quency and power, however, the relative phase of the two components is varied according to this range.
Page 74 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts ALC IF IF Filter (analog): Normal IF Filter (analog): Wideband, Narrowband band- (dB) (ms) (ms) (dB) (ms) (ms) width control control 10 kHz 0.66 0.042 0.35 0.025 0.215 100 kHz 0.11 0.0014 0.04 0.315 0.003 0.031...
Page 75 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts 5.1.6.1 Channel Data Flow The diagram below illustrates the data processing stages for the entire channel. All stages are configurable. Note that the channel data flow for S-parameters (and quantities derived from S- parameters such as impedances, admittances, stability factors) differs from the chan- nel data flow for wave quantities (and derived quantities such as ratios).
Page 76 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts RAW WAVE Channel data flow QUANTITIES for all traces of the channel SYSTEM ERROR CORRECTION (Factory) SYSTEM POWER POWER SYST. ERR. ERROR CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION DATA (User) DATA (User) * S-parameters Wave quantities with wave de-/embedding Wave quantities without DEEMBEDDING...
Page 77 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts calibration on the measured wave quantities, intermediate results were transformed to the S-parameter domain. Before each de-/embedding step, the S-parameters were transformed to conductance (~ wave quantities), and vice versa afterwards. The new "wave de-/embedding" remains in the wave quantity (~conductance) domain and calculates all de-/embedding steps in one multiplication step, without unnecessary matrix inversions.
Page 78 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts Channel data flow for all traces AVERAGE of the channel Trace 1 Mem 1,1 Mem 1,2 Trace 2 Mem 2,1 Mem 2,2 Unformatted Trace data flow TRACE MATH for individual traces SHIFT RESPONSE TIME DOMAIN GATE *...
Page 79 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements 5.2 Screen Elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Chapter 5.3, "Measurement Results", on page 104.
Page 80 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements 5.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select System – [Display] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
Page 81 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements of the triangle can be changed to modify the diagram scale and shift the trace verti- cally. ● Measured quantity (for the active trace): The measured quantity is indicated in the trace list; see "Trace List and Trace Settings"...
Page 82 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ● The format section shows how the measured data is presented in the graphical display. Use the context menu of the format section to change the format of the related trace. ● The next sections show the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisions ("Scale Div.") and the reference value ("Ref").
Page 83 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements 5.2.1.3 Markers Markers are tools for numerical readout of measured data and for selecting points on the trace, or, in general, in the diagram area. A marker is displayed with a symbol (e.g. a triangle, a crossbar or a line) on the trace, which can be a data trace or a memory trace.
Page 84 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements If the marker position is adjusted using the roll key, the mouse or the cursor keys, it always remains within the sweep range. If set explicitly by entering a numeric value, the marker position can be outside the sweep range. In this case, the marker symbol is automatically positioned to the start or stop value of the sweep range, whichever is closer.
Page 85 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ● To change the format of the active marker, select [TRACE] > "Marker" > "Marker Properties" > "Marker Format". ● To express the coordinates of the active marker relative to the reference marker, activate the delta mode [TRACE] >...
Page 86 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Marker Format Description Formula Real Real part of z Re(z) = x Imag Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y (Voltage) Standing Wave Ratio SWR = (1 + |z|) / (1 – |z|) dB Mag Phase Magnitude of z in dB and phase in two lines 20 * log|z| dB arctan ( Im(z) /...
Page 87 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ***) Only avaiilable for transmission measurements (see Chapter 5.3.3.1, "Converted Impedances", on page 109) Marker Coupling It connects the markers of a set of traces. Marker coupling allows you to compare different measurement results (assigned to dif- ferent traces) at the same stimulus value.
Page 88 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Multiple Peak Search Multiple peak search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Markers 1 to 10 are assigned to the peaks detected from the start frequency towards the stop frequency. Multiple peak search uses its own search and tracking settings; search and tracking settings for standard marker search are ignored.
Page 89 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ● "Loss" is the loss of the filter at its maximum (or minimum) and is equal to the response value of marker no. 1. For an ideal bandpass filter, the loss is zero (0 dB), for an ideal bandstop filter it is –∞...
Page 90 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements sweeps) or the CW frequency (for power sweeps), and the measurement band- width ("BW"). ● Stop indicates the highest value of the sweep variable (e.g. the highest frequency measured), corresponding to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram. Open a segment's context menu to access common related tasks.
Page 91 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements The functions of the context menu can also be called using the menu bar or the related softtool panels. Use whatever method is most convenient. 5.2.2 Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way.
Page 92 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements In most dialogs, however, it is possible to cancel an erroneous input before it takes effect. The settings in such dialogs must be confirmed explicitly. The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish: ●...
Page 93 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ● "Look in:" specifies the directory to be listed. The icons to the right of the pull-down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system (place the cursor on the icons to obtain "Whats this" help). ●...
Page 94 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements 5.2.2.3 Multi-channel Setup Dialog Depending on the desired DUT and measurement type, the measurement channel has to be prepared in a particular way. The multi-channel setup dialog was invented to make this task as easy as possible. Figure 5-2: Multi-channel setup dialog The buttons in the optional "Setup"...
Page 95 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements log to find out more about the resulting frequncy ranges and possible frequency range violations: After the channel configuration is applied, the related setup dialog and mode can be recalled at any time using the wrench icon in the main toolbar. When reopened, the "Reset"...
Page 96 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Diagram Representation When a Cartesian trace is assigned to a diagram, the stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis (x-axis), the response values appear on the vertical axis (y-axis). Graph Scaling ● Except for the "Log Mag" format, the y-axis scale is always linear. ●...
Page 97 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Trace Format Description Formula "Lin Mag" Magnitude of z, unconverted |z| = sqrt ( x "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "Delay" Group delay, neg. derivative of the –...
Page 98 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Example: Reflection coefficients in polar diagrams If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S etc.), then the cen- ter of the polar diagram corresponds to a perfect load Z at the input test port of the DUT (no reflection, matched input).
Page 99 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith" trace correspond to points of equal resistance R and reactance X: ● Points with the same resistance are located on circles. ● Points with the same reactance produce arcs. The following example shows a Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value, the complex impedance Z = R + j X and the equivalent inductance L.
Page 100 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Example: Reflection coefficients in the Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ (e.g. S ), then the unit Smith chart can be used to read the normalized impedance of the DUT. The coor- dinates in the normalized impedance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows (see also: definition of matched-circuit (converted) impedances): From this equation, it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the com-...
Page 101 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Inv Smith For "Inv Smith" formatted traces, the response values are interpreted as complex reflection coefficients S and represented in terms of their corresponding complex admittance Y(S ) = G(S ) + j B(S In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith"...
Page 102 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction: ● The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance (real admittance). The center of the diagram represents Y/Y = 1, where Y is the reference admittance of the system (zero reflection).
Page 103 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Examples for special points in the inverted Smith chart: ● The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit (Y = infinity, U = 0) is one, its phase is –180 deg. ●...
Page 104 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Complex dimensionless quan- Complex quantities with dimensions: Real quantities: tities: Wave quantities, Z-parameters, Y- S-parameters and ratios parameters, impedances, admittan- Smith ON (reflection coefficients S – – Polar – – Inverted Smith ON (reflection coefficients S –...
Page 105 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Meaning of 2-port S-parameters The four 2-port S-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the reflection coefficient of DUT port 1, i.e. the ratio between outgoing wave and incident wave a in a forward measurement with matched DUT port 2: , if |a | >...
Page 106 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results The indices of the S-parameters described so far number the output and input ports of a DUT; the parameters are referred to as single-ended S-parameters. The S-parameter description can also be used to differentiate between different propagation modes of the waves at the output and input ports.
Page 107 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Redefined Physical Port 1 a wave: b b wave: b Source: Port 1 Redefined Physical Port 2 a wave: a b wave: b Source: Port 4 coupler Figure 5-5: Two redefined ports High Signal Power When dealing with external signal amplification, make sure that: ●...
Page 108 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Conversion formula for wave quantities and S-parameters Renormalization transforms the "raw" S-matrix S for the default reference impedances (with physical port number index i = 1,2,...,n) into a "renormalized" S-matrix S the modified reference impedances Z .
Page 109 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results             5.3.3 Impedance Parameters An impedance is the complex ratio between a voltage and a current. The analyzer pro- vides two independent sets of impedance parameters: ●...
Page 110 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Example: For a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z is the input impedance (matched-circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement). A converted impedance Z completely describes a one-port DUT. The calculation formula of the converted reflection impedances Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which...
Page 111 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results The calculation formula of a converted parallel transmission impedance Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which Reference Impedances are calculated. Table 5-6: Calculation of Converted Parallel Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves 5.3.3.2 Z-Parameters...
Page 112 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results The four 2-port Z-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I measured at port 1 (forward measurement with open output, I = 0).
Page 113 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results The four 2-port Y-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ● is the input admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V measured at port 1 (forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit, = 0).
Page 114 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Examples for using wave quantities The wave quantities provide the power at the different receive ports of the analyzer. This is different from an S-parameter measurement, where the absolute power of a lin- ear device is canceled.
Page 115 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Examples: ● "b Src Port 1" is the ratio of the outgoing wave at DUT port 2 and the incident wave at DUT port 1 (i.e. DUT port 1 ist stimulated). This corresponds to the forward transmission coefficient S ●...
Page 116 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results point. Normal detector mode ensures that the measurement is performed at maxi- mum speed and that a meaningful complex result is obtained. ● "AVG" collects all valid results at each sweep point during the "Detector Meas Time"...
Page 117 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Internal balance- unbalance conversion Logical Physical VNA ports VNA ports Common Differential mode mode Balanced port Physical transformer (balun) Unbalance-balance conversion avoids the disadvantages of real transformers: ● There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated baluns for each type of DUT.
Page 118 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Example: 2 physical ports: Reflection measurements on 1 balanced port Balanced port: Differential mode Log. Bal. port port Common mode 3 physical ports: Reflection and transmission measurements on 1 balanced port Single-ended Balanced port: (unbalanced) port Differential mode Single...
Page 119 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results The notation of a general S-parameter is S , where <mout> and <min> <mout><min><out><in> denote the output and input port modes, <out> and <in> denote the output and input port numbers. Meaning of 2-port mixed mode S-parameters The mixed mode 2-port S-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ●...
Page 120 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results 3. DUT with one balanced and one single-ended port. 4. DUT with two balanced ports or one balanced and two single-ended ports. Both device types are fully characterized by 4x4 mixed mode S-matrices. 5.3.6.3 Imbalance and Common Mode Rejection An ideal unbalance-balance transformer (balun) converts an unbalanced signal into a...
Page 121 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Logical port i Logical port j (single-ended) (balanced) Physical port c Single- Log. Balanced Physical port a ended port port port Physical port d – = –S and Imb = –S – CMRR and CMRR dsji csji...
Page 122 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Stability factors are calculated as functions of the frequency or another stimulus parameter. They provide criteria for linear stability of two-ports such as amplifiers. A lin- ear circuit is said to be unconditionally stable if no combination of passive source or load can cause the circuit to oscillate.
Page 123 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces where Δt is the propagation time of the wave across the DUT, which often can be expressed in terms of its mechanical length L , the permittivity ε, and the velocity of mech light c.
Page 124 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Segments do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus" value of segment no. n does not have to be smaller than the "Start Stimulus"...
Page 125 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces Logarithmic interpolation The analyzer offers a logarithmic interpolation mode that allows you to carry over the limit line definition to logarithmic sweeps. While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized.
Page 126 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces 5.4.1.2 Rules for Ripple Test Definition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus"...
Page 127 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 123). 5.4.1.3 Circle Limits A circle limit is a special type of upper limit line which is defined by its center coordi- nate in the diagram and its radius.
Page 128 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces ● With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Smith diagram (Z = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the impedance (Im(Z), reactance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 129 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 130 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces 5.4.1.4 File Format for Limit Lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...
Page 131 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R&S ZNx and R&S ZVx families use the same file format. Limit line files can be interchanged without restriction. 5.4.1.5 File Format for Ripple Limits The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export ripple limits.
Page 132 By convention, Touchstone files use file extensions .snp, where n is the number of network ports. The following displays an s1p export file in "Version 1.1 (ZNx)" format: 50.00 ! Rohde & Schwarz Vector Network Analyzer ! Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,2.20 ! Created: UTC 12/24/2020, 5:20:26 PM ! My Comment ! freq[Hz]...
Page 133 R&S ZNA inserts into a Touchstone file during export. During import, the R&S ZNA ignores all comments. VNA identification These comment lines identify the VNA that was used to generate the file. ! Rohde & Schwarz Vector Network Analyzer ! Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,2.20 User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 16...
Page 134 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces The first line is fixed, the second reflects the configurable identification string of the instrument. Timestamp The timestamp comment line reflects the time at which the Touchstone file was cre- ated. For "Version 1.1 (ZNx)" export format, it is represented as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC): ! Created: UTC 12/24/2020, 5:20:26 PM The other export formats "Version 1.1"...
Page 135 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces If balanced (and mixed mode) parameters are exported, the assigned logical port numbers are used: ! freq[Hz] re:Sdd11 im:Sdd22 re:Scd22 im:Scd22 re:Sdc22 im: Sdc22 re:Scc22 im:Scc22 ● "Version 1.1" and "Version 2.0" export formats These export formats always use single-ended identifiers Sij and port numbers 1 to n in the table header.
Page 136 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces Keywords are new in Touchstone standard version 2.0. They are not allowed in version 1.1 files. The purpose of the keywords is to give more details about the file contents in a stand- ardized way.
Page 137 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces Network Parameter Data The network parameter data section contains one block of network parameters per fre- quency point. Each block is preceded by a frequency value, i.e. the first entry in the first (or only) data line of a data block is a frequency value.
Page 138 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces The "snp Free Config" export mode allows you to define ● the set of (physical) ports whose S-parameters shall be exported and ● the order in which they are exported The examples above represent the simple scenario with consecutive ports {1,...,n} and natural ordering.
Page 139 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces Renormalization of S-Parameters Renormalization means that the S-parameters at connector impedances are converted to S-parameters at certain target impedances. During Touchstone export, the S-parameters can be renormalized in two ways: ● Common target impedance The <reference resistance>...
Page 140 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration or dB Mag-Phase, respectively. The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog. ● <imTrace2>... second response value of second trace: im<Trace_Name> for output format Re/Im, ang<Trace_Name> for output formats lin. Mag-Phase or dB Mag- Phase.
Page 141 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Calibration or system error correction is the process of eliminating systematic, reprodu- cible errors from the measurement results (S-parameters and derived quantities). The process involves the following stages: 1. A set of calibration standards is selected and measured over the required sweep range.
Page 142 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Cal Off label A label "Cal Off" appears in the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace: This can happen for one of the following reasons: ● The sweep range is outside the calibrated frequency range. ●...
Page 143 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflection OSM Open, Short, for Port i Reflection tracking, High Reflection measure- ments on any port. Match Source match Directivity, One Path Two Ports Open, Short, for fixed source Reflection tracking, Medium to high...
Page 144 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Reflect (at both Reflection tracking, High, high directiv- Reflection and ports), transmission mea- (n-port) Source match, surements, espe- Through, Line1, Directivity, cially for planar cir- other Lines cuits.
Page 145 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration standard allows you to eliminate errors due to the directivity of the internal couplers, which improves the accuracy of reflection measurements on well-matched DUTs (high return loss). For reflection measurements on DUTs with low return loss, accuracy may be degraded compared to a simple reflection normalization.
Page 146 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Match – Through) calibration. The four standards are used to derive 6 error terms for each signal direction: ● In addition to the source match and reflection tracking error terms provided by the one-path two-port calibration, TOSM also provides the load match. ●...
Page 147 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration ● UOSM can be selected explicitly in the "Calibration Setting" dialog. After acquiring the calibration sweep data for the unknown through, the analyzer auto- matically determines its delay time/transmission phase. 5.5.1.5 Adapter Removal Many DUTs use different connector types on their RF ports (e.g. port 1: N-type connec- tor, female;...
Page 148 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Figure 5-7: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients. Uncertainties arising from a non-ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel, whereas they add up in the UOSM technique. As a consequence, Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results.
Page 149 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.1.7 TSM Calibration A TSM (Through – Short – Match) calibration requires a low-reflection, low-loss Through standard with an electrical length that can be different from zero, a Short, and a Match. The characteristics of all standards must be fully known; the Match can have non-ideal characteristics.
Page 150 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration To shift the calibrated sweep range to smaller or larger frequencies, you can use a lon- ger or shorter Line. To extend the calibrated range, use one of the following methods: ● Perform TRL calibration with two or three different Line standards. With an appro- priate length of the Lines, the ratio for the start and stop frequency of the calibrated sweep range can increase to approx.
Page 151 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration The calibration sweep segments for two Lines with electric lengths l and l > long short long ) are obtained as follows (the Through standard is assumed to be of length l short ● The longer Line can be used up to a frequency f where its transmission phase is long...
Page 152 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.1.10 TNA Calibration A TNA (Through – Network – Attenuation) calibration requires two-port standards only. Again, the Through standard must be ideally matched and lossless. The Symmetric Network must have the same properties as the Reflect standard used for a TRL cali- bration.
Page 153 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.1.12 Complementary Isolation Measurement For each port pair in a manual transmission normalization or TOSM calibration, the Through measurement can be complemented by an isolation measurement. This mea- surement accounts for possible crosstalk between the related test ports (e.g. on a test fixture).
Page 154 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.2.1 Calibration Standard Types The following table gives an overview of the different standards and their circuit models (offset and load models). Table 5-8: Calibration standard types Standard Type Characteristics Ideal Standard Offset Model Load Model ∞...
Page 155 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration ● The loss is the energy loss along the transmission line due to the skin effect. For resistive lines and at RF frequencies, the loss is approximately proportional to the square root of the frequency. In Keysight mode, the offset loss is expressed in units of Ω/s at a frequency of 1 GHz.
Page 156 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.2.2 Cal Kit Parameter Types The analyzer uses three types of parameters to describe the calibration standards. The parameter type is the same for all standards in a kit and therefore appended to the kit name: ●...
Page 157 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration The following additional parameters are used: ● Characteristic impedance: Z (characteristic impedance of the connector type) ● Loss: 0 dB / sqrt(GHz) or (0 GΩ / s) in Keysight mode ● All inductance and capacitance parameters are set to zero. 5.5.2.3 Sliding Match Standards The Sliding Match is a one-port standard consisting of an air line with a movable, low-...
Page 158 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration The analyzer combines the data in an appropriate manner: ● The Match results are used up to the lower edge of the specified frequency range of the Sliding Match (Min Freq). ● The Sliding Match results are used for frequencies above the Min Freq. In general, the Sliding Match provides better results than the Match within its specified fre- quency range.
Page 159 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration na.support.keysight.com/vnahelp/products.html. The decimal separator used by the ® VNA Cal Kit Manager V2.1 depends on the language version of the Windows operat- ing system: Cal kit files generated on an English operating system contain dots, the ones generated on a German system contain commas.
Page 160 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Table 5-10: Calibration labels (system error correction) Label Meaning The system error correction is applied without interpolation. This means that a set of measured correction data is available at each sweep point. Cal int The system error correction is applied, however, the correction data for at least one sweep point is interpolated from the measured values.
Page 161 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports. ●...
Page 162 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration The unit is ready to be used, see Chapter 5.5.5.2, "Performing an Automatic Calibra- tion", on page 162. Safety aspects ● The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to R&S ZNA network ana- lyzers following the procedure described above.
Page 163 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Accuracy considerations To ensure an accurate calibration, please observe the following items: ● Unused ports of the calibration unit must be terminated with a 50 Ω match. ● No adapters must be inserted between the calibration unit and the test ports of the analyzer.
Page 164 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.5.3 Characterization of Calibration Units Each calibration unit is delivered with factory characterization data which ensure an accurate calibration for all standard applications. For specific modifications of the test setup, e.g. the connection of additional adapters to a calibration unit, a modified set of characterization data (suitable for the cal unit with adapters) may be desirable.
Page 165 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration The multiple port assignment method considerably extends the range of applications of the calibration units. However, the method entails some loss of convenience because you have to reconnect the calibration unit between the different calibration stages (assignments).
Page 166 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration the accuracy of the calculated Throughs. Additional port assignments can improve the accuracy, if they add more measured through connections. Example: The following examples show minimal port assignments for a Full 9-Port calibration using a four-port calibration unit: Table 5-11: Full n-port: Star-shaped optimum solution Test Port Assignment 1...
Page 167 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Calibration of S-parameters S-parameters are not affected by a scalar power calibration. S-parameters are ratios of incident and outgoing waves: for linear DUTs, they do not depend on the absolute power. For measurements on non-linear DUTs, a SMARTerCal is recommended. A SMARTerCal is also appropriate for frequency conversion measurements.
Page 168 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.6.1 Source Power Calibration A source power calibration ensures accurate power levels of the generated waves at an arbitrary calibration plane in the measurement path. Typically the calibration plane corresponds to the input of the DUT. In a frequency sweep, the power at the calibration plane is maintained at a constant "Cal Power"...
Page 169 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration based on the previously calibrated reference receiver. This speeds up the calibra- tion procedure but does not impair its accuracy. Tip: It is also possible to perform the source (flatness) calibration using a power meter (without previously calibrating the reference receiver).
Page 170 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration width of 10 kHz. Smaller IF bandwidths are maintained during the calibration sweep; larger bandwidths are restored after the sweep. The analyzer measures the power at each sweep point, compares the result with the nominal power of the source, and com- piles a correction table.
Page 171 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration A lower label in the list has priority over the higher labels (e.g. if the power calibration is interpolated and the source power is changed, then the label PCao is displayed). Interpolation and extrapolation The analyzer can interpolate and extrapolate power correction data so that a source or receiver power calibration can be reused after a change of the frequency sweep range: ●...
Page 172 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration B: Two-port at power meter (during calibration) Test and measurement procedure: 1. Perform the calibration with the additional two-port between the analyzer port and the power sensor. During the calibration, the analyzer increases the power sensor values by the 2-port transmission coefficients to move the calibration plane of the power calibration towards the input of the DUT.
Page 173 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration For an overview of measurements and recommended calibration methods refer to Table 5-13. 5.5.7.1 Calibration Procedure A SMARTerCal is a fully menu-guided process which is performed like a regular sys- tem error correction. The calibration wizard defines the calibrated ports and the calibra- tion type;...
Page 174 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration SMARTerCal Type Based on ... Manual calibration Calibration unit ☑ ☐ PTNA ☑ ☐ P-Adapter Removal Adapter Removal The selection criteria for the SMARTerCal calibration types are identical to the criteria for system error corrections. For an overview, refer to Chapter 5.5.1, "Calibration Types", on page 142.
Page 175 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The receiver power calibration included in the SMARTerCal is not indicated separately. If a SMARTerCal is combined with an additional scalar source power calibration (see Chapter 5.5.7.3, "Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration", on page 174), the trace list may contain an addition power calibration label according Chapter 5.5.6.3, "Power Calibration...
Page 176 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.1 Offset Parameters Offset parameters compensate for the known length and loss of a (non-dispersive and perfectly matched) transmission line between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT. The analyzer can also auto-determine length and loss parameters, assuming that the actual values should minimize the group delay and loss across a configurable fre- quency range.
Page 177 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding In practice, the frequency-dependent part ist often dominant, so that Loss can be set to zero. Experimentally, the loss value at DC can be determined in a separate mea- surement at a very low frequency (f --> 0). 5.6.1.3 Auto Length The "Auto Length"...
Page 178 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Use Trace – [Marker] > "Set by Marker" > Zero Delay at Marker to set the delay at a special trace point to zero. Preconditions for Auto Length, effect on measured quantities and exceptions "Auto Length"...
Page 179 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The effect of "Auto Length and Loss" on S-parameters, wave quantities and ratios is to eliminate a linear phase response and account for a loss as described above. Conver- ted admittances or impedances are calculated from the corresponding "Auto Length and Loss"...
Page 180 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● "Open and Short" causes the analyzer to calculate the correction data from two subsequent sweeps. The results are averaged to compensate for errors due to non-ideal terminations. Auto Length and Loss vs. Direct Compensation "Auto Length and Loss"...
Page 181 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The offset parameters are also suited for length and delay measurements; see Chap- ter 5.6.1.3, "Auto Length", on page 177. In contrast to the embedding/deembedding functions (see Chapter 5.6.2, "Embedding and Deembedding", on page 181) the parameters cannot compensate for a possible mismatch in the test setup.
Page 182 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● A combination of four-port and two-port networks can be applied to any pair of sin- gle-ended ports. Moreover it is possible to combine several port pairs in an arbi- trary order (port pair de-/embedding). ●...
Page 183 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.2.3 Circuit Models for 2-Port Networks The lumped element 2-port transformation networks for (de-)embedding consist of the following two basic circuit blocks: ● a capacitor connected in parallel with a resistor ●...
Page 184 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L (as seen from the analyzer port), followed by a serial C or L. They are named Shunt C, Serial L / Shunt L, Serial C / Shunt C, Serial C / Shunt L, Serial L.
Page 185 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L and two serial elements, described by imported 2-port S-parameters. They are named Serial 2-port, Shunt C / Serial 2-port, Shunt L / Shunt L, Serial 2-port / Shunt C, Serial 2-port.
Page 186 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Since FW version 1.93, the "capacitance C in parallel with resistance R" circuit blocks can alternatively be represented as "capacitance C in parallel with conduc- tance G" circuit blocks. 5.6.2.5 Port Pair De-/Embedding Port pair de-/embedding extends the functionality of balanced port de-/embedding to pairs of single-ended physical ports.
Page 187 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.2.6 Port Set De-/Embedding The port set de-/embedding feature allows de-/embedding a linear 2m-port network connecting m physical VNA ports to m physical DUT ports (m≥2). Network Analyzer Embedding Network 2m-1 Figure 5-9: Port Set De-/Embedding As shown in section Combining Several De-/Embedding...
Page 188 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● For port pairs (i.e. for m=2), the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 5.6.2.5, "Port Pair De-/Embedding", on page 186.
Page 189 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Differential Matching Network Balun In contrast to standard balanced embedding (4-port), the matching circuit is only applied to the differential mode port (2-port). It can be specified via a Touchstone s2p file or by parametrizing a lumped "Shunt L, Shunt C"...
Page 190 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Fixture Modeling Process For all supported tools, the fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture. The results are independent of a particular DUT.
Page 191 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open 1x Short 1x Open 1x Short Figure 5-11: Test Coupons (balanced) Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open...
Page 192 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Figure 5-13: De-/Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added. The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single Ended Deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2.
Page 193 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 2. Single ended deembedding 3. Balanced port deembedding 4. Balanced port embedding 5. Single ended port embedding 5.7 Optional Extensions and Accessories The instrument can be upgraded with various software and hardware options, provid- ing enhanced flexibility and an extended measurement functionality.
Page 194 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories For a complete list of options, accessories, and extras refer to the product brochure or to the "Options" section of the R&S ZNA product pages on the Internet. The following sections provide an introduction to the software and hardware options described in this documentation.
Page 195 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.2.1 Chirp z-Transformation The Chirp z-transformation that the analyzer uses to compute the time domain response is an extension of the (inverse) Fast Fourier Transform (FFT). Compared to the FFT, the number of sweep points is arbitrary (not necessarily an integer power of 2), but the computation time is increased by approx.
Page 196 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-17: Comparison of band pass and low pass modes Transform Band pass Low pass type Advantages Easiest to use: works with any set of equi- Higher response resolution (doubled) distant sweep points Includes information about DC value Real result Impulse and step response...
Page 197 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-18: Properties of frequency windows Window Side lobe sup- Relative impulse Best for... pression width No Profiling (Rect- 13 dB – angle) Low First Side lobe 43 dB Response resolution: separation of (Hamming) closely spaced responses with compara- ble amplitude...
Page 198 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories is sufficiently above the f , the entire set of sweep points is shifted towards lower frequencies so that the stop frequency is decreased. If the start frequency of the sweep is close to f , then the sweep points can have to be shifted towards higher frequencies.
Page 199 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Table 5-19: Properties of grid types Grid type: Keep Sweep Time Unambig- Algorithm fails if... time domain uous resolution range Stop freq. and no. of – points Freq. gap and no. of Stop frequency beyond upper fre- points quency limit...
Page 200 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The gated trace is transformed back into frequency domain using a "No Profiling (Rect- angle)" window. The shape, width and position of the time gate affect the gated frequency domain trace. The window type selection in the "Define Transform" dialog is ignored. The selected window is used again when the TD trace is displayed ("Time Domain: On").
Page 201 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories blue arrow = direct signal red and green arrows = reflected signal TD S Calculation VSWR The ANSI time-domain method relies on a complex transmission measurement (S using a vector network analyzer (VNA). A time-domain transformation of the frequency domain data shows the impulse response between the two antennas.
Page 202 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.2.7 Distance-to-Fault Measurements Option R&S ZNA-K2 also offers a special distance-to-fault measurement that allows you to locate faults and discontinuities on cables and transmission lines. Faults produce peaks on the impulse response (in the time domain) that is calculated from the measured reflection S-parameter trace via inverse Fourier transformation.
Page 203 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● The maximum distance that can be measured is inversely proportional to the fre- quency span. The smaller the frequency span, the longer the maximum distance between the calibrated reference plane and the fault to be located. However, a smaller frequency span comes at the cost of a coarser distance resolu- tion.
Page 204 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-14: Eye Diagram (NRZ modulated) The measurement proceeds as follows: 1. The analyzer performs a frequency sweep. 2. The impulse response is calculated based on the results of the preceding fre- quency sweep.
Page 205 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-15: Eye Diagram Result Info Field The following results are available: ● Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing. These values include any over- and under-shoots seen during the symbol transitions.
Page 206 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The Crossing Height is the height above "Eye Base" where the rising and falling edges cross, "Crossing Percent" gives the same value as a percentage of the "Eye Amplitude". ● Opening Factor This is a measure of the effects of amplitude noise on the vertical eye opening.
Page 207 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-17: Rise Time Measurement Skew Measurement The skew measurement allows you to compare the step responses calculated from dif- ferent traces measured on the same analyzer channel. The skew is calculated as the "delta time"...
Page 208 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.3 Frequency Conversion Measurements Option R&S ZNA-K4 With option R&S ZNA-K4, the frequencies of the source ports can be configured inde- pendently. The source and receive frequencies of the ports are always equal. Arbitrary port settings represent a major extension to the analyzer's measurement functionality;...
Page 209 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Internal Second Source For a 4-port R&S ZNA, a second internal source is available and hence the mixer mea- surements outlined above (and many other measurements) can be performed without an additional external generator. The limited source connectivity can be overcome with option R&S ZNA-B3 (see Chapter 5.7.17, "Internal 3rd and 4th Source for 4-port R&S...
Page 210 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories For a two-port R&S ZNA, a test setup with an external generator and an external combiner is required. Lower Tone Upper Tone The lower tone signal is generated at port 1, the upper tone is provided by the external generator.
Page 211 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The intermodulation distortion measurement can be extended to frequency-converting DUTs. E.g., it is possible to feed the two-tone source signal to the RF input of a mixer and measure the intermodulation distortion of the IF output signal, after conversion with an additional LO signal.
Page 212 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories SO URCE MEAS SO URCE MEAS O U T O U T O U T O U T Figure 5-19: RF ports, external combiner The lower-tone port must be a VNA port, the upper-tone port can be an external gener- ator port.
Page 213 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories SO URCE MEAS SO URCE MEAS O U T O U T O U T O U T Figure 5-21: Direct access to lower-tone port, external combiner The lower tone is generated at a VNA port, the upper tone is also provided by the ana- lyzer (4-port models only) or by an external generator.
Page 214 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● In the intermodulation spectrum measurement ("CW Mode Spectrum"), the fre- quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant. The analyzer dis- plays all intermodulation products near the signals up to a selectable order. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 215 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Intermodulation Quantities A nonlinear DUT that is supplied with a two-tone signal with the lower/upper frequen- cies f and f causes emissions at frequencies which correspond to sums and differen- ces of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multiples: –...
Page 216 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories + IMk / (k – 1) L, in The intermodulation suppression generally decreases with increasing stimulus power. The intercept point is equal to the lower tone power for which the intermodulation sup- pression would reach 0 dB.
Page 217 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories signal (from a local oscillator, LO) is applied to the RF mixer's LO port, resulting in an output signal at the mixer's Intermediate Frequency (IF) port. For a given RF signal, an ideal mixer would produce only two IF outputs: one at the frequency sum of the RF and LO (IF = RF + LO), and another at the frequency difference between the RF and LO (IF = |RF –...
Page 218 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The figure above also shows the possible output frequencies of the two mixers. The actual values of f and f depend on the RF and LO frequencies and of the measured conversion (lower sideband or upper sideband with up- or down-conversion).
Page 219 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories – RF signal (left side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 1), frequency sweep range (or fixed frequency, if the LO signal is swept), CW power, frequency con- version settings (1 / 1 denotes no conversion). –...
Page 220 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories – RF signal (left side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 1), fixed power, CW fre- quency, frequency conversion settings (1 / 1 denotes no conversion). – LO signals (1 or 2, from below): Signal source (analyzer port or external gener- ator), fixed power, CW frequency, frequency conversion settings.
Page 221 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Compared to conventional measurement methods, the mixer delay measurement offers several additional advantages: ● A network analyzer with standard functionality is sufficient. ● Easy calibration using a calibration mixer. ● See also "Two-Tone Generation and Combination"...
Page 222 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The source ports and the properties of the coherent signals are all defined in the "Source Coherence" dialog. After a system error correction, the coherent signals with the selected properties are available at the calibrated reference plane. Prerequisites for accurate phase control ●...
Page 223 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Like the virtual differential mode, the true differential mode requires a port configu- ration with at least one balanced port. However, in true differential mode a bal- anced source port requires independent sources for the constituent physical ports.
Page 224 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● In a phase imbalance sweep, the analyzer changes the phase offset between the physical ports within a configurable range. Imbalance Compensation of a Waves Since the mixed-mode S-parameters of a linear balanced DUT depend only on the DUT itself, they will be independent of the amplitude or phase imbalance of the stimu- lus signal.
Page 225 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Depending on the network analyzer type and the number of independent sources avail- able, different test setups are possible. 5.7.6 Pulsed Measurements Option R&S ZNA-K7 Measurements on pulsed RF signals are required in many areas of RF and microwave technology.
Page 226 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories – with option R&S ZNA-K7 "Pulsed measurements" ● R&S VSE: – basic or enterprise edition (licensed separately) – running on the R&S ZNA or on a PC that is reachable via LAN –...
Page 227 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.7 Millimeter-Wave Converter Support Option R&S ZNA-K8 Requires or B26. Measurements at frequencies beyond the analyzer's operating range (mm-wave mea- surements) are achieved by combining a frequency-converting measurement with an external test set (frequency converter). The frequency converters use frequency multi- pliers to transform the RF source signal from one of the network analyzer ports into a high-frequency stimulus signal.
Page 228 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories R&S Converter Leveling Tool For linearization of the converter output power over a wide range of power levels and frequencies, the R&S Converter Leveling Tool can be used. It conducts a reference receiver calibration and records the converter's power transfer function.
Page 229 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Generally, a measurement with a mm-wave converter involves the following steps: 1. R&S ZCxxx series: connect the converter to the VNA via USB. The analyzer firm- ware automatically identiifes the converter and reads the factory leveling data. 2.
Page 230 Software option R&S ZNA-K30 allows you to measure the noise figure of a 2-port DUT, operating in its linear range. Currently, this option is only available for R&S ZNA26 and R&S ZNA43. Noise figure (or noise factor, if the linear representation is chosen) is an important fig- ure of merit for system designers and eventually determines the overall system perfor- mance of a receiver.
Page 231 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories and S denote the signal power at the input and output of the DUT, respectively. and N represent the noise present at the input of the DUT and at the output of the DUT, respectively.
Page 232 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories the R&S ZNA port and the calibration plane, including connecting cables, additional external attenuators, adapters, etc. Figure 5-27: Equivalent circuit used for the calculation of the DUT noise factor A noise temperature T is converted into the corresponding noise factor F using the equation: Source Noise Temperature As already mentioned, it is important to have precise knowledge of the noise present at...
Page 233 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-28: Model used for the receiver noise calibration Using the model above, it is possible to calculate the receiver noise temperature T using the following formula: In this formula, N is the measured noise power during calibration, k is the Boltz- M,rec mann constant (1.38064852e‑23 J/K), and B is the equivalent noise bandwidth of the...
Page 234 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Frequency-converting DUTs Due to the existence of image (receive) bands, the noise figure of a frequency-convert- ing DUT is calculated slightly different than the noise figure of a non-frequency-con- verting DUT. The noise factor F of a frequency translating DUT is calculated using the following formula: where...
Page 235 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.11 Measurement Uncertainty Analysis Option R&S ZNA-K50/R&S ZNA-K50P Measurement uncertainty analysis is available if option R&S ZNA-K50 and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.6 or higher) are installed on the instrument. Option R&S ZNA-K50P offers the same functionality as option R&S ZNA-K50, but comes with METAS VNA Tools preinstalled.
Page 236 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-29: S-parameter measurements with uncertainty bands Required input data for METAS VNA Tools: ● METAS VNA model (noise floor, trace noise, receiver linearity, drift) This model is provided by the analyzer firmware. ●...
Page 237 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Required to calculate the calibrated S-parameters and their uncertainties. If rele- vant settings are changed on the VNA, these changes are also propagated to the METAS VNA Tools. ● Measured S-parameters (uncalibrated) The raw ("uncalibrated") data are handed over to the METAS VNA Tools after every sweep for real-time correction and uncertainty analysis.
Page 238 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-30: Fixture modeling: EZD – Single Ended Ports dialog Figure 5-31: Fixture modeling: EZD – Balanced Ports dialog ● For general information about fixture de-embedding, see Chapter 5.6.2.9, "Fixture Modeling and Deembedding", on page 189.
Page 239 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.13 In-situ De-Embedding Option R&S ZNA-K220 This option offers a pre-installed or service-retrofitted version of AtaiTec's In Situ De- Embedding (ISD) tool for fixture de-embedding. The tool is integrated into the de-embedding functionality of the analyzer firmware. ●...
Page 240 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The R&S ZNA uses the Clear Signal Solutions AITT-DL implementation of the Delta-L v4.0 algorithms (see https://clearsig.com/clearsig/tools/#Delta). It allows you to per- form: ● 1L (one line/length) analysis Typically used for high-volume manufacturing (relative comparison) ●...
Page 241 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories For standard Windows users, SWP is disabled. To enable it, right-click the system tray icon and select one of the available actions: For details see the R&S ZNA-K51 user manual that is installed with the software. 5.7.17 Internal 3rd and 4th Source for 4-port R&S ZNA R&S ZNAxx-B3 ●...
Page 242 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories This option is not available for 2-port R&S ZNA. 5.7.20 Memory Extension for Data Streaming R&S ZNA-B7 Hardware option R&S ZNA-B7 comprises an additional memory board, that is exclu- sively used for buffering data of the measurement and reference receivers. Compared to the standard memory, the buffering speed is twice as high.
Page 243 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.21 LO Out R&S ZNA-B8 Hardware option R&S ZNA-B8 provides a dedicated Rear Panel local oscillator output port. This port is particularly useful for driving millimeter wave converters. If you use a power splitter to connect the LO Out of the R&S ZNA to the LO In ports of the converters, then it is possible to measure n converter ports with an n-port R&S ZNA, without the need for an external generator.
Page 244 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Risk of board and instrument damage Please turn off the R&S ZNA before mounting an internal RFFE-GPIO extension board R&S ZNA-B15. A hot plug installation is not supported and can damage board and instrument.
Page 245 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories By inverting the signal routing of RF out and measurement path, the sensitivity of the measurement receiver is increased by 10 to 20 dB. Figure 5-34: Standard vs. reverse coupler configuration Make sure not to overdrive the measurement receiver, when using the reversed cou- pler configuration.
Page 246 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.26 Direct IF Access Option R&S ZNA-B26 Hardware option R&S ZNA-B26 enables direct access to the IF signal path of the R&S ZNA via Rear Panel connectors IF Reference and IF Meas . ●...
Page 247 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories All logic levels are LV-TTL 3.3 V, 5 V tolerant. 5.7.30 Direct Source Monitor Access R&S ZNAxx-B161/B163/U161/U163 For instruments that are equipped with Source Step Attenuators, the direct source monitor options give access to the unattenuated generator signals of port 1 and 3. The signal does not have to pass the respective source step attenuator, which is particu- larly useful for measurements requiring a low stimulus power, such as high gain (con- verter) measurements.
Page 248 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Port y = 1, 3 Source Step Meas Port y Source Meas Step Src Mon Out Figure 5-36: B16 jumpering for direct source monitoring ● Options R&S ZNAxx-B161/163 are only available with hardware option R&S ZNAxx-B16 (see Chapter 5.7.23, "Direct Generator/Receiver Access",...
Page 249 To retrofit the internal combiner, the R&S ZNA must be sent to Rohde & Schwarz service. 5.7.32 Internal Low Noise Preamplifier Hardware option R&S ZNA26-B302 | R&S ZNA43-B302 Hardware option R&S ZNAxx-B302 provides an internal low noise pre-amplifier (LNA) at receive port 2 of a R&S ZNAxx.
Page 250 5.7.33 Internal Low Power Spur Reduction Amplifier Hardware option R&S ZNA26-B501 | R&S ZNA43-B501 The purpose of option R&S ZNAxx-B501 is to lower the local oscillator (LO) leakage at port 1, which is required for properly measuring high gain DUTs (> 60 dB) or DUTs with low input compression.
Page 251 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories step attenuator, which can be freely set and therefore allowing to optimize the input compression and noise behavior at this measurement receiver. See Figure 5-40. ● The R&S ZNA must be equipped with a receiver step attenuator at port 1 (option R&S ZNAxx-B31) ●...
Page 252 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories R&S®ZNA2x-B21: Source step att (0-70 dB/10 dB) Source R&S®ZNAxx-B161: Direct Source Monitor Access R&S®ZNAxx-B31: 10 dB Receiver step att (0-35 dB/5 dB) Meas. receiver Ref. receiver R&S®ZNAxx-B501: Low Power Spur Reduction 30 dB Figure 5-42: Internal Low Power Spur Reduction Amplifier with Direct Source Monitor Access (simpli- fied)
Page 253 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) Power meter / sensor ● Power calibration: An external power meter can measure the exact signal power at an arbitrary point in the test setup (reference plane) and thus provide the reference values for a power calibration.
Page 254 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Zeroing Zeroing calibrates the external power meter by adjusting its reading at zero signal power. For this purpose, the RF cable between the analyzer and the power sensor must be disconnected (see tips below!). R&S power sensors and power meters auto- matically detect the presence of any significant input power.
Page 255 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) External generator ● Power calibration: An external generator can provide the reference signal for a source or receiver calibration. A typical example is a receiver power calibration using a measured wave b User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 256 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) External generator External generators must be configured in the System – [Setup] softtool before they are available as additional sources. Configured generators appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNA, e.g.
Page 257 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Use another device as master: Set the analyzer to "External" frequency reference and synchronize it (and all other devices) to the master's reference clock signal, fed in at the Reference In connector on the analyzer's rear panel. Fast sweep mode and conditions In list mode the external generator steps through a predefined list of frequencies or sig- nal powers.
Page 258 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The firmware support of the R&S ZVAX-TRM extension unit is based on the generic devices functionality. A generic device's control interface is declared in one or more device configuration files, using the popular JavaScript Object Notation (*.json file format).
Page 259 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Example: Generic Device Configuration "Header": "File Format": 1.0 "Device Identification": "Settling Time": 0.03 "Commands": "Command Name": "MySetting1", "Command List": { "Command": "My:Device:Command 1" { "Command": "My:Device:Command 2" "Command Name": "MySetting2", "Command List": { "Command": "My:Device:Command 1"...
Page 260 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories To fulfill its purpose, the plug-in can communicate with other processes / peripherals that are not part of the VNA firmware or host OS. 5.7.38.1 Basic Use Case A basic use case is the integration of a power supply into an arbitrary VNA sweep. Suppose that you want to test an amplifier with various bias settings.
Page 261 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories If an external DLL is configured for permanent use, it performs a particlar task (such as switching the state of a DUT or controlling external devices) without providing data. 5.7.38.3 Trace Calculation in the Channel Calculation Chain To enable the calculation of trace results using data from external DLLs, a dedicated calculation step for external DLLs is inserted directly after the averaging step in the cal- culation chain (see...
Page 262 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories DC power measurement For the R&S ZNA an external power supply is required to measure P User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 16...
Page 263 ® GUI Reference R&S Function Keys and Softtools 6 GUI Reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly. The softtools, in turn, can be opened in the following ways: ●...
Page 264 ® GUI Reference R&S Function Keys and Softtools Table 6-1: Function keys and softtools Function Key Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action Trace – [Meas] Alt + Shift + A Meas Softtool default Trace – [Format] Alt + Shift + B Format Softtool default Trace –...
Page 265 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Function Key Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action System – [Applic] Ctrl + N Applic Softtool default System – [Display] Ctrl + S Display Softtool default System – [Setup] Ctrl + T Setup Softtool default System –...
Page 266 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Depending on the desired DUT and measurement, the measurement channel has to be prepared in a particular way. A dedicated multi-channel setup dialog guides you through the channel configuration (see Chapter 5.2.2.3, "Multi-channel Setup Dialog", on page 94).
Page 267 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Meas" softtool tab Channel Mode Required Software Option Power Sensor Tab Spectrum Tab Spectrum R&S ZNA-K1 External DLL Tab Mixer Params (Frequency Converting DUTs) All frequency converting measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K4 (see Chapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 208).
Page 268 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Meas" softtool tab Channel Mode Required Software Option (in addition to R&S ZNA-K4) Intermodulation Tab Intermodulation Measure- mentsIntermodulation (frequency converting) Chapter 6.2.7, "Gain Compres- Converter compression sion Tab", on page 312 Chapter 6.5.5, "Time Domain Time Domain Analysis R&S ZNA-K2 Tab",...
Page 269 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Setup Opens the S-Params Setup Dialog. S-Parameter (selector) Selects an S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Single-ended (unbalanced) S-parameters are referred to as S<out>< in>, where <out> and <in> denote the output and input logical port numbers, respectively. In presence of balanced ports, standard S-parameters are defined in the form S<m_out><m_in><out><in>, where output mode <m_out>...
Page 270 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool S<out><in> Selects one of the four elements of the standard 2-port S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21" | "S22" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21"...
Page 271 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool For background information, see Chapter 5.3.3.1, "Converted Impedances", on page 109. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S11" | "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S11" | "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... Y <- S-Parameters ←...
Page 272 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Z11" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Z11" ... Imbalance/CMRR ← Y/Z/k/μ-Parameters Allows you to select an imbalance or common mode rejection ratio (CMRR) parameter as measured quantity. These measurements are only available if at least one balanced port is active.
Page 273 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool A typical application of stability factors is to assess the stability of an amplifier. Stability factors cannot be calculated in balanced port configurations. For background informa- tion, see Chapter 5.3.7, "Stability Factors", on page 121. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "KFAC21"...
Page 274 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.2.3 More S-Params Dialog Allows to select an arbitrary S-parameter as measured quantity, along with a suitable Detector. Access: Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" > "More S-Params..." S-Parameter "S-Parameter (selector)" on page 269. Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the results points from the raw measure- ment data.
Page 275 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool This dialog can only be opened, if a balanced and two single-ended logical ports are configured in the Balanced Ports Dialog. ● The Logical Port on the left represents the balanced test port: any (active) bal- anced logical port can be selected ●...
Page 276 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "IMB-<j><k>" | "IMB<j><k>-" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "IMB-<j><k>" | "IMB<j><k>-" 6.2.2.5 Balanced Ports Dialog The "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to enable/disable physical ports and to define logical ports (balanced or unbalanced) in the active channel. Access: Channel –...
Page 277 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● For a balanced port, two physical ports are combined to form a single logical port. ● For unused ports, the physical port is crossed out; no logical port number is assigned. Select Predefined Port Allows you to select from a set of predefined logical port configurations.
Page 278 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Physical Ports / Logical Ports Allows you to renumber logical ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Define Physical to Logical Port Relation Allows you to define balanced, single-ended, and unused ports. In principle, it is possi- ble to combine any pair of two physical ports into a balanced port.
Page 279 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-1: Reference Impedance Tab (4 physical ports) By default, the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port. However, it can be defined as an arbitrary complex value (renormalization of port impedances).
Page 280 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PORT<PhyPt>:ZREFerence [SENSe<Ch>:]LPORt<LogPt>:ZCOMmon [SENSe<Ch>:]LPORt<LogPt>:ZDIFferent Connector Allows you to specify the connector type of the related physical port. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<PhyPt> Use Default Allows you to toggle between default and renormalized port impedance (or impedan- ces) for the selected logical port and connector type.
Page 281 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.3.1 Controls on the Wave Tab The "Setup" button opens the S-Params Setup Dialog. The "More Wave Quantities..." button opens the More Wave Quantities dialog which allows to select an arbitrary wave quantity, e.g. for different source ports or higher port numbers.
Page 282 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● "b1 Source Port 2" is the wave received at physical port 1. In a standard S-parame- ter measurement, this wave is transmitted at port 2 of the DUT (reverse measure- ment). ● "b2 Source Port 2" is the wave received at physical port 2. In a standard S-parame- ter measurement, this wave is fed to the output port (port 2) of the DUT (reverse measurement).
Page 283 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana- lyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ●...
Page 284 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool To configure external generators, use the "External Generators" dialog. See Chap- ter 5.7.36, "External Generators", on page 254. Properties Allows you to select the measurement detector and the display unit for the selected wave quantity. Detector ←...
Page 285 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.4.1 Controls on the Ratio Tab The "Setup" button opens the S-Params Setup Dialog. The "More Ratios..." button opens the More Ratios dialog which allows to select an arbitrary ratio of wave quantities. b / a<j> Source Port <j> Selects predefined complex ratios of the standard 2-port wave quantities a...
Page 286 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● "b1/a2 Source Port 2" is the ratio of the wave quantities b and a and corresponds to the S-parameter S (reverse transmission coefficient). The analyzer can also measure arbitrary ratios for other source ports; see Chap- ter 6.2.4.2, "More Ratios Dialog",...
Page 287 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ● The source port for the stimulus signal must be specified in addition. ●...
Page 288 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Port Allows you to select the source for the stimulus signal. ● "None", "Port <Pt>", or "Conv <Pt>", if Use Generator as Source is not checked ● "Gen " if "Use Generator as Source" is checked Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>"...
Page 289 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Noise Figure (tool button) Opens the Noise Figure Setup Dialog, which allows you to set up the NF measure- ment. Quick Setup Noise Figure (tool button) Opens the NF Quickset Dialog, which allows you to swiftly set up a NF measurement. The dialog provides guidance in terms of optimized measurement configuration and calculates the required measurement and calibration settings, such as source power and detector times.
Page 290 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine 'b1/a2(P2)' | 'b1/a3(P3)' | ... | 'b2/a1(P1)' | 'b2/a3(P3)' | ... "Receiver Noise Figure": CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure 'NF1R' | 'NF2R' | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine 'NF1R' | 'NF2R' | ... 6.2.5.2 Noise Figure Setup Dialog The NF "Setup" dialog is an instance of the Multi-channel Setup Dialog.
Page 291 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-3: NF Setup dialog: frequency-converting Driving Port (RF) / Receiving Port (IF) Allows you to select the driving port (the RF port for frequency-converting DUTs) and the receiving port (the IF port) for the noise figure measurement. It is recommended to us a driving port which is equipped with a source step attenuator to suppress to inter-...
Page 292 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Cal Plane The power levels shown at the calibration plane are only valid after a source flatness calibration was performed. Ext Preamp Config In this dialog, different configurations using an external preamplifier can be set. Depending on the chosen configuration, only applicable calibration types are recom- mended.
Page 293 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: "Bandwidth" on page 449 Noise Det Meas Time For measuring the noise power, the root-mean-square (RMS) of each measurement sample is calculated. The noise detector measurement time sets the detector time at each measurement point for the detector, allowing to choose how many RMS val- ues are used at each frequency.
Page 294 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-4: NF setup: Cal & Meas Overview dialog With all relevant settings displayed on one page, you can check if NF calibration and measurement are set up properly without browsing through various dialogs. Quickset Opens the NF Quickset Dialog...
Page 295 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool General > IF Frequency ← Advanced Settings For typical applications, the IF frequency is chosen automatically and depends on the chosen Noise Bandwidth and the measurement frequency. However, for certain mea- surements it can be preferable to choose a different IF frequency. The manually chosen IF frequency is applied over the full measurement frequency range.
Page 296 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Example 1: A broadband amplifier with a positive gain ranging from 500 MHz to 6 GHz typically requires sideband correction during a precise NF measurement. For such an amplifier, several higher-order sidebands of the VNA receiver are within its gain band- width.
Page 297 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-5: NF Quickset dialog The dialog provides guidance in terms of optimized measurement configuration and calculates the required measurement and calibration settings, such as source power and detector times. Meas Settings The controls in the "Meas Settings" section allow you to enter the start and stop fre- quency of the NF measurement, and the...
Page 298 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Set the "Input Power" to a value in the linear region of the DUT. A good starting point is approximately 10 dB below the 0.1 dB input compression point of the DUT. Result Settings In the "Result Settings"...
Page 299 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Driving Port Allows you to evaluate the influence of the source monitor on the measurement time. Activating the source monitor here is equal to activating it in the "Input/Output Tab" on page 574 of the "Port Configuration" dialog. Receiving Port For the receiving port, you can activate or deactivate the Reverse Coupler Configura-...
Page 300 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool The detector times are calculated based on the VNA characteristics. They ensure that the selected trace noise is achieved over the intended frequency range, with minimum overall measurement time. Recommended Measurement and Calibration Settings This section gives an overview of the power settings the Quickset function recom- mends for an ideal calibration and measurement, without compression of the DUT or the VNA receivers.
Page 301 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.6.1 Controls on the Intermodulation Tab After a [Preset], most of the controls on the "Intermodulation" tab are disabled. They are enabled after the current channel has been set up for an intermodulation measure- ment (see "Intermod"...
Page 302 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine CW Mode Spectrum In CW spectrum mode, the intermodulation measurement is performed at fixed fre- quency of the lower tone ("CW Frequency") and the upper tone ("CW Frequency" + "Tone Distance"). The analyzer displays intermodulation products up to a selectable order ("IM Order") around the lower and upper tone frequencies.
Page 303 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● "Add CW Mode" Activates a new channel for the spectrum measurement. The "CW Frequency" plus half the "Tone Distance" defines the center of the diagram. ● "Spectrum = Marker" This button is only available if the analyzer is equipped with software option R&S ZNA-K1;...
Page 304 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Access: Trace – [Meas] ("Non-Frequency Converting") > "Intermodulation" > "Inter- mod." Figure 6-6: Intermodulation Setup Dialog (non-frequency converting DUT) Port and Signal Path Setup The graphical part of the dialog allows you to define the related ports and the signal path.
Page 305 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "External Use the signals of the test ports and combine them externally (see (Port)" graphic above). With this configuration, the two-tone signal is available at the output of the combiner. This allows you to measure intermodulation products at the DUT output, but not at the DUT input.
Page 306 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Use Coupler This configuration does not require an external combiner, but pro- as Combiner" vides a reduced dynamic range. It combines the signals of the lower tone and upper tone sources using the directional coupler of the upper tone port as combiner: With this configuration, the two-tone signal is available at test port 1.
Page 307 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Lin Freq" The channel is set to Lin Freq sweep type. The lower tone port sweeps with channel settings (see "Start Frequency/Stop Frequency/ Number of Points/Base Power" on page 307), the upper tone in par- allel with a given Delta Frequency.
Page 308 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Step Att Receiving Port Only available if the selected Receiving Port is equipped with a receiver step attenua- tor (see Chapter 5.7.27, "Receiver Step Attenuators", on page 246). Defines the receiver step attenuation at this port. Frequency Overview Dialog The "Frequency Overview"...
Page 309 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-7: Intermodulation Setup Dialog (frequency converting DUT) 6.2.6.4 Intermodulation Measurements Dialog Allows you to select the measured quantities that are relevant for intermodulation mea- surements. Access: Trace – [Meas] > "Intermodulation" > "Intermod Product" | "Intercept Point" | "Main Tone"...
Page 310 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool IM<order><side>O Absolute InterModulation product (displayed in dB units). ● <order> defines the order of the intermodulation product. Possible values are 3, 5, 7, or 9. ● <side> defines the position of the intermodulation product relative to the lower and upper tones.
Page 311 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool IP<order><side><DUT port> Intercept Point at DUT output ● <order> defines the order of the intercept point. Possible values are 3, 5, 7, or 9. ● <side> defines the position of the intercept point relative to the lower and upper tones.
Page 312 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Lower Tone at DUT Out" (LTO), "Lower Tone at DUT In" (LTI), "Upper Tone at DUT Out" (UTO), and "Upper Tone at DUT In" (UTI) are measurements of the two funda- mental waves of the intermodulation measurement. 6.2.7 Gain Compression Tab Allows you to configure and perform compression point over frequency measurements.
Page 313 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Compression Point Power In / Compression Point Power Out / Compression Point S-Param Selects the input power, output power, or transmission S-parameter value at the <x dB> compression point as the measured quantity, where <x dB> is the specified Compression Value.
Page 314 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-8: Amplifier Compression dialog Driving Port/Receiving Port Selects the driving and receiving port for the gain compression measurement. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:SRCPort [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:RECeiver Sweep Type Compression measurement channels are set up for linear frequency sweeps. For each point on the (linear) frequency grid, the firmware performs a power sweep.
Page 315 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Power Points Defines the number of points for the power sweeps at each point on the frequency grid defined using Start Frequency/Stop Frequency. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:POWer:POINts 6.2.7.3 Converter Compression Setup Dialog Similar to the Amplifier Compression Setup Dialog, but with additional configuration possibilities for frequency converting DUTs.
Page 316 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.9 Time Gate Tab The "Time Gate" tab is enabled by software option R&S ZNA-K2. It mirrors the Time Gate Tab of the Trace – [Trace Config] softtool. 6.2.10 Power Sensor Tab Allows you to set up and perform measurements using external power sensors. The standard test setup for a "Power Sensor"...
Page 317 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the power meter which must be disconnec- ted from the RF power; see "Zeroing" on page 254. A message indicates that zeroing is finished. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<Pmtr>:AZERo Source Port Selects one of the available test ports of the analyzer as a source of the stimulus sig-...
Page 318 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.11.1 Controls on the Spectrum Tab The controls on the "Spectrum" tab allow you to select a port and to define how the spectrum trace is calculated. The sweep parameters and other channel settings are defined in the Chapter 6.2.11.2, "Spectrum Setup Dialog",...
Page 319 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Trace mode Infinite averaging Hold mode "Clear Write" "Hold OFF" "AVG" "Hold OFF" "Min Hold" "Min Hold" "Max Hold" "Max Hold" Reset History to reset the averaging/minimization/maximization history. Remote command: Use the commands for Infinite Averaging Hold according to the table above.
Page 320 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-9: Spectrum Setup dialog (non frequency-converting DUT) Sweep Type / ... / Base Power Basic frequency sweep settings as defined in the Stimulus Tab Sweep Params Tab. In spectrum mode, the receiver is swept linearly. Resolution BW Sets the resolution bandwidth, see "Bandwidth"...
Page 321 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Access: Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" mode > "External DLL" 6.2.12.1 Controls on the External DLL Tab Configuration / Perm. Settings Opens the External DLL Configuration Dialog. Measurement The "Measurement" section gives access to the custom traces of the loaded plug-ins. Each external DLL <ext_dll_name>.dll that provides at least one custom trace type, adds a measurement button "<ext_dll_name>"...
Page 322 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Loaded DLLs table Displays the loaded plug-in DLLs and their configuration in the current channel. Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:LIST? Active ← Loaded DLLs table Allows you to de-/activate the respective plugin in the current channel. An active plugin can be used to create traces and/or can be made Permanent.
Page 323 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Version/Interface Version ← Loaded DLLs table "Version" is purely informative. It reports the version of the DLL, as specified by its developer. "Interface Version" is the version of the plug-in SDK that was used to compile the DLL (more precisely, the version of the interface RsVnaCustomDllInterface.h against which it was compiled).
Page 324 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:TASK:ADDRess 6.2.12.3 Power Added Efficiency (PAE) Dialog The "Power Added Efficiency (PAE)" dialog configures the measurement of the PAE of an active 2-port device. ● The PAE measurement is preinstalled on instruments shipped with FW V2.15 or higher.
Page 325 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool A PAE measurement involves the following steps: 1. Enter the measurement parameters. 2. Establish the test setup (including the RF connections of the DUT and the DC INPUT connections) as shown in the circuit diagram. 3.
Page 326 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool In/Out Define the logical ports for the RF input and output signal, respectively. Remote command: "In" is specified as <Src Port> in the trace identifier (see "Define Trace" on page 326) "Out" is specified as "Additional Input" rport=<int value>; 6.2.12.4 Trace Definition Dialog Specifies a custom trace that is provided by an external DLL.
Page 327 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Additional Input For some task types, the basic information in "Define Trace" can be supplemented with "Additional Input". This string is processed by the external DLL, with DLL-specific syn- tax and semantics. If it is malformed or inappropriate for some reason, the firmware logs and displays the error messages that are returned by the DLL.
Page 328 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● The "Setup Frequency Converting DUT" button opens the Scalar Mixer Meas Setup Dialog that allows you to prepare one or more channels for Scalar Mixer Measurements. ● The "More ..." buttons open the Frequency Converting Measurements Dialog that offers all available measurement parameters for scalar mixer measurements.
Page 329 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool In its upper part, the dialog shows a diagram with the RF and LO signals, the mixing product (IF), and the current frequency and power ranges for all signals. The diagram is adjusted according to the "2nd Mixer" selection; see "Two-Stage Mixer Measure- ments"...
Page 330 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool The frequency-converting device is considered to be part of the mixer system under test (MUT). In the default configuration where the RF signal is swept and the LO sig- nals are at fixed frequency, the conversion factors do not modify the analyzer's source signals (RF, LO 1, LO 2).
Page 331 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:PMFixed [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:TFRequency<Stg> [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:STAGes Activates the scalar mixer mode and closes the dialog. A "Mix" label in the channel list indicates that a scalar mixer measurement is active. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion 6.2.13.2 Frequency Converting Measurements Dialog The "Frequency Converting Measurements"...
Page 332 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-12: Frequency Converting Measurements dialog: vector mixer measurements Conversion Gain/Conversion Phase Tab Conversion Gain tab (scalar/vector mixer measurements) Offers the full set of gain measurement parameters for frequency-converting DUTs. Conversion Phase tab (vector mixer measurements) Offers the full set of phase measurement parameters for frequency-converting DUTs.
Page 333 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Converter Waves Tab Offers the full set of wave parameters for frequency-converting DUTs. 6.2.14 Vector Mixer Meas Tab Sets up the channel for phase measurements on a frequency converting DUT (a.k.a. vector mixer measurements), and lets you select the quantities to be measured. These measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K5.
Page 334 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● The "Setup Frequency Converting DUT" button opens the Vector Mixer Meas Setup Dialog that allows you to prepare one or more channels for Vector Mixer Measurements ● The "More ..." buttons open the Frequency Converting Measurements Dialog that offers all available measurement parameters for mixer measurements.
Page 335 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool This dialog offers the same settings as the Scalar Mixer Meas Setup Dialog. However, for vector mixer measurements the LO ports must be controlled by the analyzer. 6.2.15 Two Tone Group Dly Tab (Frequency Converting DUT) Sets up the channel for a two-tone group delay measurement (a.k.a.
Page 336 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.15.1 Controls on the Two Tone Group Dly Tab Setup Frequency Converting DUT Opens the Two Tone Group Delay Setup Dialog. Measurement Allows you to select the quantities to be measured. The "Main Tone" button opens a dialog for quantity selection: User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 337 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 2 Tone Delta Freq. Allows you to select the frequency delta between upper tone and lower tone. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:APERture Mixer Delay The controls in this section allow you to configure and perform a mixer delay calibra- tion.
Page 338 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Lower Tone Select the port that generates the lower tone of the two-tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:LTONe Lower Tone Select the port that generates the upper tone of the two-tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:UTONe Select the receive port for the two-tone group delay measurement.
Page 339 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:CONVersion 6.3 Format Softtool The "Format" softtool allows you to define how the measured data is presented in the diagram area. Access: Trace – [Format] Measured quantities and display formats The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (see Chapter 6.2, "Meas Softtool",...
Page 340 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e. |C| = sqrt ( Re(C) + Im(C) ), appears on the vertical axis, scaled in dB. The decibel conversion is calculated according to dB Mag(C) = 20 * log(|C|) dB.
Page 341 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Polar Selects a polar diagram to display a complex quantity, primarily an S-parameter or ratio. Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis.
Page 342 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e. φ (C) = arctan ( Im(C) / Re(C) ), appears on the vertical axis. φ (C) is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep (refer- ence phase = 0°).
Page 343 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
Page 344 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Application: Transmission measurements, especially with the purpose of investigating deviations from linear phase response and phase distortions. To obtain the delay, a fre- quency sweep must be active. Tip: The cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT introduce an unwanted delay, which often can be assumed to be constant.
Page 345 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool With n sweep steps the delay at sweep point no. m is calculated as follows: ● If n is even (n = 2k), then Δf (m) = f (m+k) – f (m–k) and ΔΦ(m) = ΔΦ (m+k) – ΔΦ (m–k).
Page 346 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool The "Scale Values" settings are closely related to the "Format" and "Display" settings. The "Scale Values" settings depend on the current trace format (diagram type) because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way: ●...
Page 347 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Alternatives to Scaling There are several alternatives to manual trace/diagram scaling. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.7, "Scaling Diagrams", on page 51 ● Chapter 4.3.3, "Touchscreen Gestures", on page 39 (zoom stimulus via spreading and pinching) ●...
Page 348 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Ref Value Sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a circular diagram. ● In Cartesian diagrams "Ref Value" defines the value of the reference line, indicated by an arrowhead symbol at the right edge of the diagram area. The color of the symbol corresponds to the trace color.
Page 349 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Related settings Refer to Chapter 6.5.1.3, "Trace Manager Dialog", on page 355. The "Trace Manager..." button opens the Trace Manager Dialog. Couple All Traces / Couple Trc ... To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace ("To Trace") to all traces / to the active trace.
Page 350 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.7, "Scaling Diagrams", on page 51 ● Chapter 6.4.1, "Scale Values Tab", on page 345 ● Chapter 4.3.3, "Touchscreen Gestures", on page 39 (zoom stimulus via spreading and pinching)
Page 351 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool You can define the zoom area using touchscreen or mouse. To modify the zoom win- dow in graphical zoom mode, you can also use the numerical input fields "Max", "Min", "Start", and "Stop". Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset If a...
Page 352 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.1.3, "Traces, Channels and Diagrams", on page 66 ● Chapter 4.3.5, "Handling Diagrams, Traces, and Markers", on page 43 In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other;...
Page 353 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The new trace is created with the settings of the former active trace, but displayed in another color. The former and the new active trace overlay each other. Change the ref- erence position or select a different measurement for the new trace to separate them (see Chapter 6.2, "Meas Softtool",...
Page 354 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool ● These actions can also be performed from the context menu of the trace name segment in the trace list (see Chapter 5.2.1.4, "Channel List and Channel Set- tings", on page 89). ● Use the "On" flags in the "Trace Manager" to show/hide arbitrary sets of traces (see Chapter 6.5.1.3, "Trace Manager Dialog",...
Page 355 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool ● Frequency Converting Measurements: see Chapter 6.2.13.2, "Frequency Convert- ing Measurements Dialog", on page 331 ● Two Tone Group Delay Measurements: see "Measurement" on page 336 6.5.1.3 Trace Manager Dialog The "Trace Manager" dialog allows you to perform operations on traces. Access: Trace –...
Page 356 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool ● "Diagram" indicates and controls the diagram area to which the related trace is assigned. ● "Scale" indicates and controls the scale coupling of the related trace. A trace's scaling can either be uncoupled ("Scale" empty) or coupled to another trace's scaling.
Page 357 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Couple All Channels / Decouple All Channels ● "Couple All Channels" assigns all traces to the channel of the active trace, deleting all other (now unused) channels. The analyzer displays a confirmation dialog box before deleting the unused channels.
Page 358 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool New memory traces are named "Mem<n>[<Data Trace>]", where: ● <n> counts all data and memory traces in the active recall set in chronological order ● <Data_Trace> is the name of the associated data trace Trace names can be changed in the Trace Manager Dialog.
Page 359 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The trace functions comprise the following mathematical operations: ● Active trace math on unformatted and formatted traces, as configured in the Chap- ter 6.5.4, "Math Tab", on page 361. ● A shift of the data trace (see "Shift Trace"...
Page 360 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool All Data to <Destination> Stores the current data of all data traces in the active recall set to memory traces, in accordance with the Destination setting. No trace functions are applied to the stored traces.
Page 361 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool New memory traces are named "Mem<n>[<Data_Trace>]" with <n> selected by the analyzer firmware to make trace names unique. Remote command: Show All Data / Hide All Data / Show All Mem / Hide All Mem Displays or hides all data or memory traces in the active recall set.
Page 362 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.4.1 Controls on the Math Tab The "Define Math..." buttons in the "Complex Data" and "Formatted Data" sections both open the User Def Math Dialog, but with different scope: ● "Complex Data" > "Define Math..." defines mathematical operations on raw com- plex trace data.
Page 363 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Trace Math ← Complex Data/Formatted Data Activates the mathematical mode, applying the last active mathematical relation to the active trace. The trace is replaced by the mathematical trace and Math is displayed in the trace list while the mathematical mode is active: "Trace Math"...
Page 364 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Access: Trace – [Trace Config] > Math > Complex Data/Formatted Data section > "Define Math..." Depending on the section from where the dialog is opened, the calculation is either based on unformatted or formatted trace data. Compatibility between traces in mathematical relations Mathematical traces are either constant functions or functions of one or more data or memory traces.
Page 365 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Expression builder The mathematical expression appears in the upper part of the dialog. The operands and operators in the expression can be selected from a keyboard and the list of "Oper- ands": ● The keyboard supports the entry of numeric values, constants, and mathematical functions.
Page 366 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool *) The operand "StimVal" can be used for all sweep types. Please note that – as with all user math operands – only the numerical value without unit is processed in the user math formula. ●...
Page 367 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Example: A mathematical trace value amounts to 1 (real value); the port impedance is 50 Ω. If "Result is Wave Quantity" is on, the analyzer assumes the trace value to be 1 V, which is converted into a linear power of 20 mW, corresponding to approx.
Page 368 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool "Low Pass Settings..." opens the Low Pass Settings Dialog. Time Domain Selects the time domain representation for the active diagram area. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active (see "Lin Freq" on page 455).
Page 369 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Type Selects a band pass or low pass time domain transform. See Chapter 5.7.2.2, "Band Pass and Low Pass Mode", on page 195. To calculate a low pass transform, the sweep points must be on a harmonic grid. Oth- erwise the analyzer can only calculate an approximate result and generates a warning.
Page 370 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Resolution Enh. Broadens the frequency range that the analyzer considers for the time domain trans- form by a linear factor. A factor of 1 means that the original sweep range and the mea- sured sweep points are used; no additional assumptions are made. With higher resolu- tion enhancement factors, the measurement data is extrapolated using a linear predic- tion method.
Page 371 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Is the Current Grid Harmonic? The area at the top of the "Low Pass Settings" dialog indicates whether the current fre- quency grid is harmonic. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic? Set Harmonic Grid and Keep The three buttons provide alternative algorithms for calculation of a harmonic grid, based on the current sweep points.
Page 372 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Automatic Harmonic Grid If enabled (default) the frequency grid is automatically kept harmonic. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]HARMonic:AUTO DC Value The control elements in this section define the measurement result at zero frequency and in the interpolation/extrapolation range between f = 0 and f = f .
Page 373 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool you can use the time gate settings to eliminate unwanted responses in your signal. After switching back to the frequency domain, you will receive the frequency response of your DUT without the contribution of the unwanted responses. The time gate is inde- pendent of the frequency window used to filter the trace before transforming it to time domain.
Page 374 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:CENTer CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SPAN CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP Show Range Lines Displays or hides two red lines indicating the start and stop of the time gate in a time domain diagram. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHOW Bandpass / Notch The filter type defines what happens to the data in the specific time region.
Page 375 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.8 Trace Statistics Tab Evaluates statistical and phase information of the entire trace or of a specific evalua- tion range and calculates the x-dB compression point. 6.5.8.1 Controls on the Trace Statistics Tab The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range Dialog",...
Page 376 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values x and n cor- responding response values y (measurement points). The statistical values are obtained as follows: ● "Min" and "Max" are the largest and the smallest of all response values y ●...
Page 377 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Phase/El Length Displays or hides the phase delay ("Phs Dly") and the electrical length ("El Len") of the trace in the selected evaluation range ("Evaluation Range..."). The parameters are only available for trace formats that contain phase information, i.e. for the formats "Phase", "Unwr Phase", and the polar diagram formats "Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"...
Page 378 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool the straight line between points A and B. The flatness is the difference between the largest and the smallest response value of this difference trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SFLatness[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Compr. Point / Compr. Val. Displays or hides all results related to the x dB (or x degrees) compression point of the trace, where x is the selected compression value.
Page 379 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The info field shows invalid results ('----') if the wrong sweep type or trace format is selected, or if no compression point with the configured properties was found. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Reference Value Selects the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation.
Page 380 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW Defined Value This setting is only visible if "Defined Value" is used as Reference Value. It manually defines the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RPHase...
Page 381 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set. "Full Span" means that the search range is equal to the entire sweep range. The trace statistics functions consider all measurement points with stimulus values x between the "Start"...
Page 382 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool ● The analyzer can export the raw complex (unformatted) data or formatted data. The unformatted data are independent of all "Smooth Shift Hold" settings; see "Formatted Values" on page 390. ● For complex traces, if marker format and trace format do not coincide, the marker values are calculated before Smoothing Hold...
Page 383 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Tip: The sweep average is an alternative method of compensating for random effects on the trace by averaging consecutive traces. Compared to smoothing, the sweep average requires a longer measurement time but does not have the drawback of aver- aging out quick variations of the measured values.
Page 384 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The "Hold" process can be restarted any time using "Restart" (current trace) or "Restart All" (all traces in the active recall set). The "Hold" process is also restarted automatically when the channel or trace settings are changed so that the previous measurement results are no longer compatible.
Page 385 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Shift Reset Resets the static shifting, defined using Stimulus Mag / Phase / Real / Imag, respectively. Tracking Mode/Ref Sweep Point Allows you to take the trace value at a selected sweep point as the reference point for a dynamic shift of the active trace.
Page 386 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool "Magnitude - Perform averaging of magnitude and phase (default) of the complex Phase" trace value. Perform averaging of the real and imaginary part of the complex trace Real - Imag value (i.e. over the complex value itself). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE 6.5.11 Trace Data Tab...
Page 387 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.11.1 Import Complex Data Dialog The "Import Complex Data" dialog loads a memory trace from a trace file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. The loaded trace data is used to generate a memory trace which is coupled to the active data trace.
Page 388 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.11.2 Export Data - <File Type> Dialog The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog stores data or memory traces to a trace file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. Access: ● Trace –...
Page 389 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Figure 6-14: ASCII Trace files export The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with several additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type").
Page 390 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Normalize with Port-Specific Impedances For Touchstone file export only. If checked, the firmware renormalizes the exported S- parameters according to the port-specific reference impedances instead of a common target impedance of 50 Ω (see "Renormalization of S-Parameters"...
Page 391 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool shift, smoothing) are considered. Some trace functions (e.g. time scale, shift stimu- lus) also affect the stimulus values. Export of formatted data is not available for Touchstone files. Field Separator For ASCII (*.csv) file export, this property defines the separator the analyzer uses to separate different numbers in each line of the file.
Page 392 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Select All / Deselect All During trace data import, selects/deselects all traces contained in the opened trace file. Auto Distribute Available for trace data import only. If checked, a selected trace S is imported as a memory trace for all data traces in the current recall set that are measuring S Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:TRACe:AUTO...
Page 393 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:PORTs Assign Selects the port number assignment in the created *.s<n>p file. By default, analyzer and *.s<n>p port numbers are identical. You can interchange the port assignment to change the order of the S-parameters in the created ´Touchstone file. Each of the ana- lyzer port numbers must be assigned to one *.s<n>p port number.
Page 394 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool "Linearity Deviation" is only available for cartesian trace formats. Activates/deactivates the linearity deviation calculation using the current Constant Slope values. When activated, the trace statistics info field is shown and populated with the following (additional) lines: ●...
Page 395 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:CONStant Reset Values Sets Constant Slope to zero, which effectively disables linearity deviation calcula- tion. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:SLOPe 0 CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:CONStant 0 6.6 Lines Softtool The "Lines" softtool allows you to define limits for the measurement results, visualize them in the diagrams and activate/deactivate the limit check.
Page 396 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool 6.6.1.1 Controls on the Limit Test Tab The "Define Limit Line..." button opens the "Define Limit Lines" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines Dialog", on page 400). Show Limit Line Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area.
Page 397 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Note: Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other: Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe] Limit Check Enables/disables the limit check for the active trace. If enabled, an additional info field is displayed in the diagram, indicating the "PASS"...
Page 398 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Figure 6-15: Limit line violations in complex trace formats Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:FAIL? CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL:ALL? CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA Limit Fail Beep Activates or deactivates the fail beep. The fail beep is a low-tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit.
Page 399 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool ● "PASS" represents pass for all traces with enabled limit check. A trace without limit lines or with disabled individual limit check always passes the global check. ● "FAIL" means that the limit check for one or more traces failed. Remote command: CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass...
Page 400 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Shift Lines By setting the "Stimulus" and "Response" values it is possible to shift a previously defined limit line in x and y direction, respectively, without having to redefine the con- stituent line segments. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt...
Page 401 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ● To define limit lines with only a few segments, select "Add" and edit each segment in the Segment List individually.
Page 402 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line. ●...
Page 403 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool The active trace must be cartesian and the "Format" of the imported trace must be the same as the "Format" of the active trace. ● "Import File..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file (see Chap- ter 6.5.11, "Trace Data Tab",...
Page 404 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Response Dialog The "Response" dialog allows you to configure the limit line segment in detail. Access: Define Limit Lines Dialog > "Response" cells For convenience, "Type", "Start Stimulus", "Stop Stimulus", and "Interpolation" are repeated from the Segment List of the "Define Limit Lines"...
Page 405 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool 6.6.2.1 Controls on the Ripple Test Tab The "Def. Ripple Test..." button opens the "Define Ripple Test" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.6.2.2, "Define Ripple Test Dialog", on page 407). Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian dia- gram area.
Page 406 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool When the limit check is switched on, a movable info field shows the pass/fail informa- tion and the measured ripple in each ripple limit range. If the ripple limit check fails at a measurement point, the point is marked with a colored square. The "Limit Fail Trace Color"...
Page 407 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Show Results All Traces Defines the visibility of ripple info fields in the active recall set. ● If disabled, only the ripple info field of the active trace is displayed (in case it has ripple check enabled).
Page 408 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool The "Define Ripple Test" dialog contains a table to edit the individual ranges of the rip- ple check ranges. The buttons below the table extend, shorten, or reorder the range list and save/recall ripple test data. Range List Defines the individual ripple limit ranges.
Page 409 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool value of the range before the active range to the "Start Stimulus" value of the active range. Its ripple limit is estimated according to the measured ripple of the trace in the created range. The range numbers in the list are adapted. If no range is active, "Insert"...
Page 410 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Show Limit Circle Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a polar diagram area. The limit line colors are defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.18.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 728).
Page 411 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay[:STATe] Limit Check Switches the limit check of the active trace on or off. When the limit check is switched on, a movable "PASS" or "FAIL" message is dis- played in the diagram. If the limit check fails at a measurement point, the point is marked with a colored square.
Page 412 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Figure 6-16: Simultaneous dB Mag limit line and circle check Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL? CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL:ALL? Limit Fail Beep Activates or deactivates the fail beep. The fail beep is a low-tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit.
Page 413 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA Global Check "Global Check" on page 398. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass" on page 399. 6.6.4 Display Circle Tab The "Display Circle" functionality allows you to limit results in complex trace formats (Smith, Polar) to a user-defined circle.
Page 414 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool left ("FAIL") = "Circle Test" enabled, but not limited to "Display Circle" right ("PASS") = "Circle Test" enabled, but limited to "Display Circle" Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] Clear Circle Resets the "Display Circle" to its default configuration (unit circle; show border: off; limit to circle: off) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar...
Page 415 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Show Horiz. Line Displays or hides the horizontal line. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe Response Value Defines/shows the response value of the horizontal line. Tip: Use the R&S ZNA's drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line to a particular position.
Page 416 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Mkr Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X Mkr Arb. Response / Ref Mkr Arb. Response Gets/sets the response value (Y position) of an "Arbitrary" marker (see "Marker Mode"...
Page 417 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Markers remember their "Marker Props" while disabled (see Chapter 6.7.2, "Marker Props Tab", on page 418). The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ- ated trace is deleted. Tip: To disable a single marker, drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the "Delete"...
Page 418 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m>...
Page 419 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Marker Format Defines the formatting of the active marker in the movable marker info field. For background information on marker formats, see "Marker Format" on page 85. "Default" means that the marker is formatted according to the related trace's Dflt Marker Frmt In "Arbitrary"...
Page 420 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool The marker can be moved freely inside the diagram, directly adjusting its X and Y coor- dinates. If in the current trace format the X axis represents the stimulus, the marker's stimulus value is adjusted accordingly. Otherwise the marker's stimulus value remains unchanged and is not shown in the Marker Info Field.
Page 421 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.3 Marker Search Tab Provides "Marker Search" functions that move the active marker to a (local) maximum or minimum of the active trace. The search operation can be restricted to a configurable range of stimulus values ("Search Range...").
Page 422 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute MINimum | MAXimum CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? Center = Marker "Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker" on page 435. Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum in the search range, depending on the selected Peak Type.
Page 423 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Define an adequate "Search Range" to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power interval (see Chapter 6.7.3.2, "Search Range Dialog", on page 423). Note: Tracking for bandfilter search can be activated separately, see "Tracking"...
Page 424 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool It is possible to define search ranges for each recall set and assign them to the corre- sponding markers and the reference marker. Select Marker Selects the reference marker or one of the numbered markers that can be assigned to the trace.
Page 425 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Note: The marker Search Ranges are identical to the evaluation ranges for trace sta- tistics. For more information, see Chapter 6.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range Dialog", on page 380. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP Range Limit Lines On Displays or hides the range limit lines in the diagram area.
Page 426 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Select Marker Allows you to select the related marker and to activate or deactivate it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Search Config Allows you to select the Target Search Mode of the selected marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute Threshold Settings Defines a threshold for (single) peak searches and activates it.
Page 427 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.4 Multiple Peak Tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic Marker Search Functions" on page 87. 6.7.4.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak Tab Max / Min Sets up to 10 markers to the highest maxima or lowest minima in the configured Eval...
Page 428 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool All Markers Off "All Off" on page 416. 6.7.4.2 Multiple Marker Config Dialog The "Multiple Marker Config" dialog allows you to configure the multiple peak searches for the active trace. Access: Trace – [Marker] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Search Config Same as selecting Max /...
Page 429 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.5 Target Search Tab The "Target Search" functions use markers to locate trace points with a specific response value ("Target Value"). The functions are unavailable if the active trace con- tains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off"). Some of the "Target Search"...
Page 430 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Target Format Description Formula "Phase unwrap" Unwrapped phase of z comprising Ф(z) = φ (z) + 2k·360° the complete number of 360° phase rotations [°] "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "SWR"...
Page 431 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.6 Bandfilter Tab "Bandfilter" search allows you to search for trace segments with a bandpass or band- stop shape, and determine characteristic filter parameters. Background information Refer to "Bandfilter Search" on page 88. Bandfilter for arbitrary scalar traces "Bandfilter"...
Page 432 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Bandpass Ref to Max Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking. The located bandpass region is the tallest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
Page 433 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA Bandpass Ref to Mkr Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking, starting at the position of the active marker. A bandpass region is the closest peak in the evaluation range that has a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
Page 434 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BSTop CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter Result Off Hides the movable info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables Tracking. The info field is displayed again (and tracking re-enabled) when a new "Bandfilter"...
Page 435 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.7 Set by Marker Tab The "Set by Marker" functions use the active marker to define the sweep range, scale the diagram and introduce an electrical length offset. The functions are unavailable if the active trace contains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off"). Examples Refer to Chapter 4.3.7.6, "Set by...
Page 436 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Ref Val = Marker / Max = Marker / Min = Marker The following functions use the response value of the active marker to scale the y-axis of the diagram: ● "Ref Val = Marker" sets the reference value equal to the response value of the active marker, leaving the values of the vertical divisions ("Scale / Div") unchanged.
Page 437 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.9 Marker Coupling Tab Allows you to set up and control marker coupling. Background information Refer to "Marker Coupling" on page 87. Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type"...
Page 438 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE Reset Marker Coupling Convenience function for disabling marker coupling and setting the Coupling Type "All" (default). Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] OFF CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ALL 6.8 Stimulus Softtool On the "Stimulus" softtool, you can access to the stimulus parameters of the active channel.
Page 439 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Power setting is also available on the "Power" tab. Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency Defines the sweep range for non-segmented frequency sweeps. For a Lin Freq sweep, setting "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" or "Center Fre- quency"...
Page 440 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points for CW Mode sweeps. This value can also be set on the "Sweep Params" tab of the "Sweep"softtool (see "Number of Points" on page 452). Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:POINts CW Frequency...
Page 441 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool 6.8.2.1 Controls on the Power Tab For power sweeps, the Start Power / Stop Power can be set on the Stimulus Tab of the "Stimulus" softtool. Some of the buttons on the "S-Params" tab open related dialogs. ●...
Page 442 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool ALC On Enables/disables automatic level control (ALC) for the current channel. If mm-wave converters are involved in the setup, the VNA firmware checks whether suitable leveling and calibration data are a active. Otherwise a warning message is dis- played and ALC remains disabled (although the checkbox is checked).
Page 443 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool 6.8.2.2 Power Config Dialog Except for the ALC settings, which are covered in the ALC Config Dialog, the "Power Config" dialog offers the same settings as the Arbitrary Power Tab of the Chap- ter 6.12.2.2, "Port Settings Dialog", on page 566.
Page 444 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool ALC On (Table Area) Enables or disables ALC for the respective port. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ALC[:STATe] Control Range +/- "Control Range +/-" is the maximum change of the source signal level due to the ALC. A value of 5 dB (default) means that the source signal level can be adjusted in a 10 dB wide symmetric range around the start value.
Page 445 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EWAVe[:STATe] Settling Tolerance Defines the maximum variation of the source signal level after the ALC has settled. The "Settling Tolerance" has an impact on the ALC Path IF Bandwidth in "Auto" mode: other things being equal, the smaller the "Settling Tolerance"...
Page 446 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer:ALC:PIParameter:CTIMe SOURce<Ch>:POWer:ALC:PIParameter:ASETtling 6.8.3 Time Domain X-Axis Tab If the active trace is a time domain trace, these settings define its stimulus axis. Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNA-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain X-Axis"...
Page 447 ® GUI Reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN Distance Start / Distance Stop / Distance Center / Distance Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in distance representation (see "Time / Distance" on page 447).
Page 448 ® GUI Reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg Softtool Access: Channel – [Pwr Bw Avg] key 6.9.1 Power Tab The "Power" tab allows you to configure the signal power. It is identical to the "Stimu- lus" > "Power" tab; see Chapter 6.8.2, "Power Tab", on page 440.
Page 449 ® GUI Reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg Softtool Bandwidth "Bandwidth" the measurement bandwidth of the IF filter. Within the value range, the entered value is rounded up to 1 · 10 Hz, 1.5 · 10 Hz, 2 · 10 Hz, 3 · 10 Hz, 5 ·...
Page 450 ® GUI Reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg Softtool 6.9.3 Average Tab Defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be averaged and enables/disables the sweep average. Effects of sweep averaging, alternative settings An average over several sweeps reduces the influence of random effects in the mea- surement and therefore minimizes the noise level.
Page 451 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Mode Selects one of the following averaging algorithms: ● "Auto": Automatic selection between "Reduce Noise" and "Flatten Noise" mode, depending on the trace type. ● "Reduce Noise": Cumulative moving averages of the real and imaginary parts of each measurement result, provides the most effective noise suppression for the "Real"...
Page 452 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool System error correction In general, the system error correction is no longer valid after a change of the sweep parameters. The status of the calibration is shown in the trace list. If the number of points is changed, the analyzer interpolates the correction data.
Page 453 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Freq Step Size Sets the distance between two consecutive sweep points of a linear frequency sweep. For linear frequency sweeps the step size is an alternative to the Number of Points setting: ● If the sweep range is defined via "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency", both the "Stop Frequency"...
Page 454 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:DWELl All Partial Meas'ments / First Partial Meas'ment Meas Delay is set to a value > 0, this setting allows you to define how the measure- ment delay is applied: ● If "All Partial Meas'ments" is selected, the delay time is added before each partial measurement.
Page 455 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool 6.10.2.1 Controls on the Sweep Type Tab Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal generator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
Page 456 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
Page 457 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Segmented In a "Segmented" (linear) frequency sweep, the sweep range can be composed of sev- eral continuous frequency sub-ranges or single frequency points. The sub-ranges are termed sweep segments and are defined in the Define Segments Dialog.
Page 458 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Any generator power calibration or attenuation of the active source step attenuators is included. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POWer CW Mode "CW Mode" sweeps, like Time sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 6.8.1, "Stim- ulus Tab",...
Page 459 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool The time interval between two consecutive trigger pulses must not be smaller than the minimum measurement time per measurement point. See "Sweep Time / Auto" on page 453. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POINt Time "Time" sweeps, like CW Mode sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
Page 460 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Pulse Profile This sweep type is only available, if the R&S ZNA is equipped with software option R&S ZNA-K7 Pulsed Measurements. Activates the pulse profile sweep defined in the Pulse Modulation Dialog. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE PULSe Phase Imbalance | Amplitude Imbalance This sweep type is only available, if the R&S ZNA is equipped with software option...
Page 461 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Tip: Overlapping limit line and ripple limit line segments are not displayed when a point-based x-axis is active; see Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 123. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SEGMent:AXIS Reverse Reverses the direction of the sweep. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:REVerse Fast Power Sweep...
Page 462 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool "On" In this mode, the power level is swept continuously and linearly from "Start Power" to "Stop Power" (swept mode, faster). For each sweep point, measurement takes place over a range of power levels. Assuming the phase drifts linearly during the sweep time, the phase can be removed from the measurement results.
Page 463 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Table Columns The table in the upper part of the "Define Segments" dialog contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable or non-editable columns: ● "On" provides check boxes to activate or deactivate each individual segment. Sweep points in inactive segments are not measured and not listed in the "Point List".
Page 464 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● "Delete All" clears the entire segment list so it is possible to define or load a new segmented sweep range. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:ADD [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete[:DUMMy] [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DELete:ALL Show Point List... Opens a list of all active sweep points and their channel settings. All columns except "Point", "Segment"...
Page 465 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Example: The segmented sweep range is described by the following sweep segment file: Note: The *.SegList file actually contains more columns listing all channel settings of the individual sweep segments. The headings of the additional columns are IF Band- width [Hz], en:IF Selectivity, en:IF Sideband, Meas Delay [µs], bo:Sweep Time Auto,en:Frq Sweep Mode.
Page 466 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Optional Columns Each selected (checked) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list. ● "Name" allows you to assign a name to each segment. A segment name is a string that is allowed to contain letters, numbers and special characters.
Page 467 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool When "Time" is checked, two new columns appear in the table. The first column is titled "Segment Time" or "Meas Delay", depending on the selected radio button below the "Time" checkbox. The second column is titled "Auto" and is used to acti- vate automatic sweep time setting.
Page 468 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Any trigger event can start an entire sweep or a part of it. Moreover, it is possible to switch off the RF source between consecutive triggered measurement sequences, and to define a delay between trigger events and the measurement sequences. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.1.4.1, "Partial Measurements and Driving...
Page 469 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool FreeRun / External / Manual / Multiple Triggers These four buttons select the trigger source: ● In "FreeRun" mode, a new measurement is started immediately without waiting for a trigger event and without fixed time reference. The remaining trigger settings are not valid.
Page 470 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● "Partial Measurement" means that each trigger event starts the next partial mea- surement at the current or at the next sweep point. If every sweep point only requires a single partial measurement, this option is equivalent to "Point". See also Chapter 5.1.4.1, "Partial Measurements and Driving Mode",...
Page 471 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Signal Type Specifies the "External" trigger mode in detail. ● "Rising Edge"/"Falling Edge" means that the rising/falling slope of every external trigger pulse can trigger a single measurement sequence. ● "Active High"/"Active Low" means that the analyzer measures in "FreeRun" mode as long as the external trigger signal is high/low.
Page 472 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool ... /Logic/ ... The table defines all settings related to "Multiple Triggers". For all measurement sequences it is possible to select (and configure) the related trigger logic: ● no trigger required ("Free Run") ● a single trigger source with configurable Signal Type ●...
Page 473 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● sending the high voltage level in active state and the low level otherwise ("Active High"), or vice versa ("Active Low"). Note that pulse generator pulses cannot be indicated using high and low voltage lev- els.
Page 474 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool 6.10.4.1 Controls on the Sweep Control Tab Continuous / Single Activate either continuous (default) or single sweep mode. ● In "Continuous" sweep mode, the analyzer measures the related channel (or chan- nels) continuously, repeating the current sweep over and over. ●...
Page 475 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Restart Sweep Stops the current measurement cycle and starts a new one. For the DEFAULT Remote Language, the effect of this command depends on the sweep modes of the active channel, and the restart behavior defined in the Restart Manager Dialog:...
Page 476 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Sweep Controller Activates/deactivates the (resizable) "Sweep Info" dialog, which displays the current sweep stage. The "Sweep Info" dialog is particularly useful for long duration sweeps that are executed in single sweep mode: by observing the dialog, it is easy to realize when the sweep is done.
Page 477 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Sweep All Channels/Sweeps If you select "Sweep All Channels", Restart Sweep restarts the sweep in all channels of the active recall set. For the DEFAULT Remote Language, the number of sweeps in single sweep mode is channel-specific and can be defined in the table below the separator line.
Page 478 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Access: Channel – [Cal] 6.11.1 Start Cal Tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration. Calibration of the R&S ZNA is a fully guided process. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
Page 479 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Measurement Traces Power meter Calibration setup mode Standard only one-port – POSM ✓ at least one two- – UOSM port PUOSM ✓ Spectrum ✓ (required) POSM (R&S ZNA-K1) Scalar mixer ✓ (required) 1x PUOSM (R&S ZNA-K4) 2x POSM (see screenshot above)
Page 480 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.1.2 Controls on the Start Cal Tab All controls on the "Start Cal" are buttons and each of them opens a dialog or dock widget wizard. The buttons are grouped in three sections. ● "Cal Active Channel"...
Page 481 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The "Scalar Power Cal" button opens the Power Cal Wizard, which allows you to perform "Ref. Receiver", "Meas. Receiver" and scalar source power ("Source Flat- ness") calibrations for the current channel. Guided Calibration... Use "Start... (Guided)" to open the Guided Calibration Wizard that allows you to config- ure and run a set of calibrations efficiently.
Page 482 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool For complex calibrations, the wizard proceeds in several steps ("Next"/"Back" buttons at the bottom of the dock widget). On "Apply", the R&S ZNA calculates the system error corrections and/or power corrections from the acquired data and applies the result to the related channels.
Page 483 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Background and related information ● Refer to Chapter 5.5, "Calibration", on page 140 for background information ● For the description of the source flatness and source power cal steps, see the des- ription of the Power Cal Wizard.
Page 484 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep The dock widget below the diagrams shows the calibrated ports and standards and vis- ualizes the measurement progress. Use the buttons representing the calibration standards to start the corresponding cali- bration sweeps. If "Show Cal Kit Label"...
Page 485 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool "Don't Show this Dialog Again" has the same effect as disabling "Show Cal Kit Label". A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data of a standard has been acquired successfully. A green checkmark after the port symbol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed.
Page 486 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected[:DUMMy] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete...
Page 487 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 2. If a SMARterCal is performed: a) Replace the calibration unit by the power meter. b) Start the power calibration sweep. The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis- plays the power meter connection.
Page 488 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep, each diagram contains a single S-parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard. The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors: If the correct standard type is measured, and everything is properly connected, then the measured trace is expected to be similar to the typical trace.
Page 489 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:ACQuire [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:POWer Detect Ports & Start Cal Performs the "Detect Port Assignment" and "Start Cal Sweep" functions, one after the other. Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNA (with a little help from the attached calibra- tion unit) auto-detects the connected ports.
Page 490 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:SAVE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:POWer 6.11.1.4 Calibration Setup Dialog Allows you to configure the calibration setup of the available channels. Access: ● Channel – [Cal] > "Start Cal" > "Cal Active Channel" – "Configure/Start Calibration" ● Calibrate All Dialog >...
Page 491 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Messages in the dialog An information message (or error message) is displayed if one of the following hap- pens: ● One of the selected calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values.
Page 492 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
Page 493 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations. See "Authentication" on page 522. See also Chapter 5.5.5.3, "Characterization of Calibration Units", on page 164.
Page 494 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Figure 6-23: Define Calibration dialog: automatic calibration The green arrow symbols give a preview of the type and the number of calibration sweeps involved: ● Curved arrows (example: "Refl Norm Open") denote one or more reflection mea- surements at each port.
Page 495 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The R&S ZNA always proposes an optimum solution (minimum number of assign- ments) that also minimizes the physical port reconnections required between calibra- tion stages. For user-modified assignments, it provides assistive information indicating insufficient, or redundant entries. The test port connectors are automatically set according to the connector type of the selected calibration unit port.
Page 496 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:DEFault [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:TPORt: DEFault Source Leveling/Src. Lev. Method Adds a Source Power Calibration of the related port to the current calibration definition, which comes in handy for SMARTer calibrations (see Chapter 5.5.7.3, "Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration", on page 174).
Page 497 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool See also Chapter 5.5.5.3, "Characterization of Calibration Units", on page 164. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CONFigure SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Query further cal unit properties: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:DATE? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:FRANge? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:PORTs? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:WARMup[:STATe]? Mixer/IMD/Harmonics Tab Defines channel-specific settings for mixer and intermodulation (IMD) measurements. Calibration Mixer Settings Defines the properties of the calibration mixer and the related calibration.
Page 498 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Keep "Fast Cal Interp. Meas" checked to stick to the faster calibration method, that does not increase the number of sweep points and uses interpolation if necessary. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:IMODulation:METHod Harmonic Orders to Calibrate If a harmonics measurement is active in the current channel, this section allows you to specify the harmonic orders to be calibrated in the current channel.
Page 499 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Noise Figure Tab In this tab you can adjust noise figure calibration settings such as power levels and detector times. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 16...
Page 500 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Quickset fuctionality in the Noise Figure Setup Dialog automatically chooses suita- ble calibration settings. Manual configuration requires carefully chosen power levels, depending on the active receiver step attenuator internal preamplifier configura- tion. In general, for a noise figure measurement, the power level at the test port input should not exceed the values given in the table below .
Page 501 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Screen Elements From top to bottom, the screen consists of the following elements. Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification"). The diagram is scaled in "dB Mag"...
Page 502 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool During a measurement receiver calibration ("Meas. Receiver"), the following traces are displayed: ● The trace "a<m>(P<m>)" shows the (previously calibrated) power at the calibrated reference plane (source port P<m>). ● The trace "b<n>(P<m>)" shows the current power reading of the analyzer at the calibrated receive port P<n>...
Page 503 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool In the converter configuration above, P1 and P2 drive the RF IN ports of converter 1 and 2, respectively, and the Converter LO port drives the LO IN ports of both con- verters. If a converter port is not configured to use leveling data, and a source flatness cali- bration is made at both the RF IN and the converter port, then the flatness cal at...
Page 504 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The power calibration state is indicated in the trace list, see Chapter 5.5.6.3, "Power Calibration Labels", on page 170. Use the functions in the Chapter 6.11.4, "Use Cal Tab", on page 533 to activate, deactivate, or store power calibrations. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:ACQuire...
Page 505 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep Starts the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and closes the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 168. Open the Pwr Cal Settings Tab if you wish to modify the calibration procedure.
Page 506 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool left: = source and meas. port identical right = source and meas. port different Port Overview The dialog shows all receiver ports of the network analyzer. The selected port is dis- played with the current cal power settings (see Chapter 6.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config Dialog", on page 528);...
Page 507 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweep for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 169. No additional calibration settings are needed. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:ACQuire [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer:DATA...
Page 508 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 168. Use the Pwr Cal Settings Tab"Pwr Cal Settings"...
Page 509 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Tap the Add + Modify button to open the Calibration Setup Dialog, which allows you to add calibration definitions or modify them. Existing definitions can be selectively deleted. Use the checkboxes in the "Enable" column to enable/disable the related calibration definition.
Page 510 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Save/Cancel Saves the channel calibration definitions to the current setup or discards unsaved mod- ifications. 6.11.1.7 Guided Calibration Wizard The "Guided Calibration" wizard lets you calibrate a set of channels using the calibra- tion methods the firmware proposes for the related measurements. If a calibration unit is connected, it is automatically used.
Page 511 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool RF power will be switched off for all ports until you proceed with "OK", which will termi- nate the "Guided Calibration" wizard. If you cancel one of those wizards, you are asked if you want to skip just the current calibration, or end the guided calibration as a whole.
Page 512 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool ● "Active Channel" if you only want to calibrate the active channel ● "All Channels" if you want to calibrate all channels in the current recall set ● "Selected Channels" if you want to calibrate only certain channels 6.11.2 Cal Devices Tab Provides access to all functions for calibration kit management and cal unit characteri- zation.
Page 513 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.2.1 Cal Connector Types Dialog The "Cal Connector Types" dialog displays and modifies the list of available connector types. Cal connector types must be selected in accordance with the connectors of the measured DUT. Access: Channel –...
Page 514 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Char. Imp. The characteristic impedance or reference impedance ("Char. Imp.") Z for the connec- tors is a critical value that has an impact on various parameter conversions. Z enters into: ● The calculation of the S-parameters for the calibration standards associated with the connector type, if they are derived from a circuit model (see "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog"...
Page 515 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Add / Delete Adds or deletes a user-defined connector type. The parameters of a user-defined con- nector type can be modified in the table. Note: Deleted/Missing Connector Types. ● Deleting a connector type also deletes all calibration or adapter kits assigned to it. ●...
Page 516 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Controls in the Calibration Kits Dialog Connector Type The "Connector Type" table displays the available cal kit connector types. Select a row in this table to get the list of Available Cal Kits. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Available Cal Kits Displays the cal kits for the selected...
Page 517 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool If option K50 "Measurement Uncertainty Analysis" is installed, the "KitModified" column is replaced by an "Uncertainty" column, indicating whether the kits contains uncertainty information for all its calibration standards. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:CATalog? Add / Copy / Delete / Standards... The buttons in the right part of the dialog are used to manage calibration kits: ●...
Page 518 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool One port and two port standards are listed in two separate tables. Most of the buttons on the right side are available only if the "Kit Standards" dialog was opened for a user- defined calibration kit. One Port Standards / Two Port Standards The standard tables contain the following information: ●...
Page 519 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool ibration kit file, instead of the gender. During the calibration, the analyzer checks whether the cal kit contains the necessary standard types for the required ports. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<StandardType> [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:<ConnType>:SELect Add / Copy... / Delete / View / Modify... The buttons in the right part of the dialog are used to manage standards: ●...
Page 520 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The diagram in the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog depends on the standard type for which the dialog was opened. Moreover, it is possible to modify the circuit model using the buttons in the upper right of the dialog. Offset Parameters The entries in the upper part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards"...
Page 521 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Load Parameters The entries in the lower part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog specify the load parameters for a particular calibration standard describing its terminal impedance. The circuit model for the load consists of capacitance C which is connected in parallel to an inductance L and a resistance R, both connected in series.
Page 522 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit Dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNA auto-detects all calibration units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connected, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
Page 523 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The properties of the selected characterization are shown below the list. "Delete" dele- tes the selected characterization file; "Start Characterization..." opens the Characteri- zation Wizard to create a characterization. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Characterization Wizard The "Characterization"...
Page 524 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Test Port Assignment Defines the assignment between test ports and cal unit ports. In the default "Manual" assignment, VNA ports and cal unit port numbers match. If you decide to use a differ- ent assignment, you can auto-detect the actual assignment ("Automatic") or select the analyzer port numbers manually.
Page 525 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Next Proceeds to Step 2: Save Characterization Data . Next is available when the R&S ZNA has acquired characterization data for a single port. Step 2: Save Characterization Data Saves the characterization data to the calibration unit. Figure 6-24: Save Characterization Data Save File to SD Card For all calibration units, characterization data can be saved to the calibration unit's...
Page 526 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.3 Pwr Cal Settings Tab Gives access to all functions for power meter and power calibration data handling (transmission coefficients). Power calibration of the R&S ZNA is a fully menu-guided process. Efficient power calibration procedure ●...
Page 527 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs: ● "Cal Power...": see Chapter 6.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config Dialog", on page 528 ● "Transm. Coefficients...": see Chapter 6.11.3.3, "Power Meter Transmission Coeffi- cients Dialog", on page 531 ●...
Page 528 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool "Power Meter Use a power meter for the calibration of the reference receiver and only" the flatness calibration. Perform a flatness calibration using the reference receiver. Do not "Ref. Receiver only" recalibrate the reference receiver; use the best available reference receiver calibration instead.
Page 529 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The diagram in the center of the dialog visualizes the settings and results below. Port Cal Power Allows you to define (port-specific) power levels for source power calibrations. Port Overview ← Port Cal Power The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer.
Page 530 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool If frequency converters are configured, the "Channel Base Power" at the RF IN port can also show "varies", which either indicates that leveling data are used or that a source flatness calibration at the converter port is active. In the former case, the combo-box is disabled.
Page 531 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool By default, the "Reference Receiver Cal Power" is set to the resulting Port Cal Power. However, the accuracy of the source power calibration depends on the power meter's measurement accuracy. Therefore it is advantageous to select a "Reference Receiver Cal Power"...
Page 532 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient[:STATe] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:CALibration Two Port Config... Opens the "Two Port Configuration" dialog that allows you to define the transmission coefficients of the additional two-port device. See "Two Port Configuration Dialog" on page 532. The button is disabled if "No Coefficients"...
Page 533 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>[: DUMMy] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>: Get Trace... Opens a selection box containing all traces in the active recall set. The "dB Mag" val- ues of the selected trace are used to define the transmission coefficients. Notice that if you combine different channels with different sweep points, the analyzer possibly has to interpolate or extrapolate the transmission coefficients.
Page 534 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.4.1 Controls on the Use Cal Tab The buttons in the "Use Cal" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Scalar Power Cal" – "Active Power Cals...": Active Power Cals Dialog ● "Manage Cals" – "Cal Manager...": See Calibration Manager Dialog User Cal Active Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel.
Page 535 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Load match correction can provide a significant improvement of the transmission S- parameter measurements if the load ports are poorly matched. With sufficiently matched load ports, you can disable the correction to gain speed. Note: Disable the load match correction if your test setup or DUT is not suited for reverse sweeps or if you want to gain speed.
Page 536 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool All possible power calibrations can be performed from the Power Cal Wizard. Port Overview Shows all source ports together with their possible power calibrations. Unavailable cali- brations (i.e. calibrations that have not been performed yet) are grayed out. If external generators are configured, they appear as additional source ports G1 ...
Page 537 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool In the converter configuration above, P1 and P2 drive the RF IN ports of converter 1 and 2, respectively, and the Converter LO port drives the LO IN ports of both convert- ers. If the source flatness calibration at the converter port is enabled, then the flatness cal at the RF IN port is disabled (and grayed out).
Page 538 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Channel State The "Channel State" table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration. Channels can use either the active channel calibration (if available), a previously stored user correction data or the factory system error correction (indica- ted as '--').
Page 539 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool For channels that are linked to a "Cal Group" (using "Apply" or "Apply to All"), a new calibration overwrites the cal group data and hence affects all channels that are also linked to this cal group. An "Overwrite Warning" is displayed in this case. To continue with the calibration, confirm by using button "Overwrite Current File?"...
Page 540 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool "Ch<n> Calibration Properties" also indicates settings mismatches (between the selected channel and the channel setup that was used during calibration) that lead to a "Cal Off". Currently this indication is limited to settings related to Parallel Measure- ments with Frequency Offset.
Page 541 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool METAS Cal Active After a successful METAS calibration, this checkbox enables or disables the uncer- tainty calculation for the related channel. ● If enabled, measurement results and uncertainties are calculated by METAS VNA Tools. ●...
Page 542 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Export Data to METAS VNA Tools Saves the current state of the METAS VNA Tools project that is created with the METAS calibration. The exported ZIP file also contains the characterizations of the standards that were used for calibration and verification.
Page 543 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Only calibration types supported by METAS VNA Tools are available. Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ●...
Page 544 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool "Normal"/"Nor- The sample detector without/with (automatic) averaging. This is the mal with AVG" default detector for all other channels, if Auto Averaging is disabled/ enabled. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:DETector [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AVERage Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Connector/Gender Specifies the connector and gender of the ports selected in Step 1: Ports and...
Page 545 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Cal Kit/Uncertainty Allows you to specify the cal kits to be used for the selected ports. For meaningful uncertainty calculations, use a cal kit that is characterized with uncertainties. Regular cal kits (without uncertainties) are also offered for selection. For these cal kits, zero uncertainty is assumed, which results in an unrealistic METAS calibration quality.
Page 546 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Proceeds to Step 3: Calibration. If the configuration is not plausible, a warning is dis- played: Step 3: Calibration In step 3, the calibration is performed. The procedure is the same as for regular cali- brations of the selected type (see Chapter 6.11.1.3, "Calibration Wizard",...
Page 547 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Verification Kit Allows you to specify the verification kits to be used for the related ports. Verification standards are characterized individually, including uncertainties. So initially no verification kits are defined. Use Import Verification Kit... to import your verification kit.
Page 548 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The imported verification kit is assigned to the selected Connector type; the name of the ZIP file is used as the verification kit name. The name of a characterization file inside the zip container must indicate ●...
Page 549 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Save Verification Data Same as Export Data to METAS VNA Tools. The exported ZIP file now also contains the METAS verification configuration, and the verification measurement data obtained so far. 6.11.5.4 METAS Reconnection Dialog While a METAS calibration is active, you can notify the METAS VNA Tools about addi- tional reconnections and/or cable movements.
Page 550 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool The effect of a reconnection depends on the selected connector, the effect of a cable movement depends on the selected cable (on their respective models, to be precise). For the METAS calibration, the VNA firmware reports the minimum possible number of reconnections (depending on the selected calibration type) and no cable movements.
Page 551 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool 6.12.1.1 Controls on the Channels Tab The buttons in the "Channels" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Channel Manager...": see Chapter 6.12.1.2, "Channel Manager Dialog", on page 553 ● "RFFE...": see Chapter 6.12.1.3, "RFFE Config Dialog for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var. 03", on page 554 Active Channel...
Page 552 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one. The name can be changed in the "Channel Manager" dialog. Tips: ● To create a channel and a trace with default settings and to display the trace in a new diagram area, use New Channel + Diagram.
Page 553 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Tips: Use the "Undo" function to restore a channel that was unintentionally deleted. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] Channel On Toggles the measurement state of the Active Channel. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] Fixture Simulator The "Fixture Simulator" switch deactivates or activates the configured deembedding, embedding, balanced ports, and port impedance settings for the selected channel.
Page 554 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Channel table The rows and columns of the channel table represent the existing channels (rows) together with certain editable (white) or non-editable (gray) properties (columns). ● "Name" indicates the name of the related channel. ●...
Page 555 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.22, "RFFE GPIO Interface", on page 243. For more details about the voltage range, clock frequency ranges and their steps sizes, refer to Chapter 11.3.4, "RFFE - GPIO Interface ", on page 1547.
Page 556 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Sweep Sequencer Tab Gives access to the "Sweep Sequencer" functionality, see Chapter 6.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 563. GPIOs Tab The "GPIOs" tab is split into two parts: ● The left part of the table area (up to column "Output Voltage") allows you to define and apply the GPIO pin voltages (see "Basic GPIO Configuration"...
Page 557 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool 6.12.1.4 RFFE Interface Configuration Access: RFFE Tab of the "RFFE Config" dialog Basic RFFE Interface Settings and Command Execution The RFFE config table gives access to the channel-specific setup of the two RFFE bus interfaces RFFE1 and RFFE2.
Page 558 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool CLK, VIO, VLow, VHigh These columns give access to the physical properties of the RFFE interfaces: clock rate ("CLK"), supply voltage ("VIO") and the voltage levels of the data signal SDATA ("VLow") and clock signal SCLK ("VHigh"). Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:FREQuency CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:SETTings:VOLTage:IO...
Page 559 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool SEND Use the "SEND" button to send the previously defined command, e.g. before starting the sweep for the related channel. On a R&S ZN-B15/Z15 var. 03, before the command is executed the related shunt resistance is set to its minimum possible value.
Page 560 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:RANGe CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:DATA:SHUNt? CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:RANGe CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:CLOCk:SHUNt? CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:RANGe CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE<Bus>:TEST:VIO:SHUNt? Use the "Set" button to apply all RFFE configuration changes and to activate the con- figured voltage and Range / Shunt settings on the RFFE pins. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:RFFE:TEST:OUTPut Start Meas...
Page 561 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-25: Basic GPIO Configuration for HW Var. 03 Seq. Enables/disables the corresponding GPIO pin in the Sweep Sequencer (see Chap- ter 6.12.1.6, "Sweep Sequencer", on page 563). Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO<Port>[:STATe] Voltage / Output Voltage Sets the (default) voltage of the respective GPIO pin for R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 Var.
Page 562 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool ● The measurement parameters are channel-specific. However only one configura- tion can be measured at a time. ● Voltage and current measurements on the RFFE and GPIO pins are only possible with Var. 03 of the extension board R&S ZN-B15/-Z15 (part number 1323.9355.03 or 1325.5905.03).
Page 563 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool The measurement (=sampling) time can only be set via remote command. It is not channel-specific and applies to RFFE and GPIO measurements. Remote command: CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO:SENSe:TRIGger CONTrol<Ch>:GPIO:TIME Voltage, Current Results of the voltage/current measurements on the related GPIO pins. Remote command: CONTrol:GPIO<Port>:SENSe:VOLTage? CONTrol:GPIO<Port>:SENSe:CURRent?
Page 564 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool 2. Use the "Add" or "Insert" button to add a new step to the command/switch sequence - either at the end of the existing sequence or above the selected step, respectively. 3. Make the appropriate settings in the sweep sequencer table: a) Define the RFFE commands ("RFFE"...
Page 565 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Wait (Sweep Sequencer Table) The cells in the "Wait" column define the delay times between subsequent sequence steps and between the final sequence step and the sweep (segment) start. Remote command: Unsegmented sweeps CONTrol<Ch>:SEQuence<Nr>:DELay Segmented sweeps: CONTrol<Ch>:SEGMent<Nr>:SEQuence<Nr>:DELay...
Page 566 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Combiner Tells the analyzer if and how signals from two ports are combined. For descriptions and visualizations of the supported combiner configurations, see "Combiner Configuration" on page 304. Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog that allows you to enable/disable physical ports and to define logical ports (balanced or unbalanced) in the active channel.
Page 567 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 208 ● Chapter 6.19.4.2, "External Power Meters Dialog", on page 762 ● Chapter 6.19.5.2, "External Generators Dialog", on page 767 ●...
Page 568 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Non-editable table cells In addition to the test ports ("Port" or "Conv"), the source ports include all configured External Generators ("Source Gen"), and the LO Out port ("Conv. LO"), if not assigned to a converter. In addition to the test ports ("Port"), the source ports include all configured external generators ("Source Gen").
Page 569 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool available as a signal source in the test setup. The analyzer provides two alternative, independent ways of selecting a generator as a signal source: ● Check "Source Gen" in the "Port Settings" dialog, especially if the generator is not assigned to a particular measurement result or drive port.
Page 570 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool The result is displayed in the "Frequency Result" column. A red "Freq. Conversion" field indicates that certain hardware limits are exceeded. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary Receiver Freq a, b Rslt Displays the resulting receiver frequencies. Receiver Freq.
Page 571 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool ● "Remove Selected Formula" removes the selected user-defined formula from this list. ● "Change Formula Name..." allows you to change the name of the currently selected user-defined formula. Note: ● User-defined formulas are persisted in the recall set. A preset deletes all user- defined formulas.
Page 572 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Channel base power After a Reset, all source port powers are set to the channel base power P . For power sweeps, P corresponds to the unmodified sweep range. For frequency, time, and CW mode sweeps, it is equal to the fixed "Power".
Page 573 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Port Power Offset Defines a port-specific offset to the Channel Base Power The actual output power at the port is equal to the "Channel Base Power" plus the "Port Power Offset". If P is selected as "Channel Base Power", then for a power sweep the actual port power varies across the sweep.
Page 574 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Receiver step attenuators are optional hardware (see Chapter 5.7.27, "Receiver Step Attenuators", on page 246). Attenuation Sets the attenuation at the respective measurement receiver (b-wave). See "Receiver Step Att." on page 442. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:ATTenuation Wb/Nb IF Gain Controls the gain of the wideband and narrowband signal paths.
Page 575 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.23, "Direct Generator/Receiver Access", on page 244 and Chap- ter 5.7.26, "Direct IF Access", on page 246. Receiver Input Determines how the MEAS and REF signals are routed to the respective receivers. Depending on the selected path, the hardware and factory correction values are set.
Page 576 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool If unchecked (default), you can define the Rear IF Frequency manually. However, this frequency is also used internally and is possibly not optimal for the Direct IF Access Input / Output ports. If you activate "Auto Determine IF Out", the analyzer firmware selects suitable rear IF frequencies.
Page 577 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Displayed Columns Opens the Displayed Columns Dialog that allows you to configure the columns to be displayed in the current tab. Reset Resets the "Freq. Conversion" and "Power Conversion" settings of all ports. After "Reset", an "Apply"...
Page 578 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-27: Displayed Columns dialog (custom tab) For the predefined tabs, only the "General" and the tab's related parameter group ("Arbitrary Frequency", "Arbitrary Power", "Receiver Level", or "Input / Output") are available for selection. Stimulus Dialog The "Stimulus"...
Page 579 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-29: Stimulus Dialog: Power Sweep Except for the "Enter & Display" properties, all these parameters can also be set in the Sweep Softtool. Depending on the channel's Sweep Type, a different set of parameters can be modified.
Page 580 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Note that setting "Enter & Display" to a particular port, source, or receiver is only possi- ble if option R&S ZNA-K4 is available. Furthermore, a particular port, source, or receiver can only be selected, if the user-defined linear function for calculating the respective frequency/power is not constant.
Page 581 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool ● Modified settings are not applied unless the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog is closed with the "OK" button. ● On "OK", any pre-existing logical port configuration is overwritten. ● Each configured DUT can have its own ground loop embedding and deembedding network DUT Definition Tab Modify an existing DUT...
Page 582 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Reference Impedance Tab The "Reference Impedance" tab of the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog allows you to set the reference impedance for balanced and unbalanced DUT ports. To change the reference impedance for a particular DUT port, proceed as follows: 1.
Page 583 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Minimum Offset The "Minimum Offset" can be specified either as an absolute value ("Direct Value") or as a multiple of the measurement bandwidth ("Bandwidth Factor"). Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:MOFFset:MODE SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:MOFFset:DVALue SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:SIMultaneous:FOFFset:MOFFset:BWFactor State indication warning When attempting to activate the "Parallel Measurement with Frequency Offset" (i.e. on closing the "Define Parallel Measurement"...
Page 584 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool 6.13.1 Mode Tab Optimizes the measurement process. 6.13.1.1 Controls on the Mode Tab Driving Mode Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps. ● In "Auto" mode, the analyzer optimizes the display update: Fast sweeps are per- formed in "Alternated"...
Page 585 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Image Suppr. The "Image Suppr." settings define whether the analyzer measures with a local oscilla- tor frequency LO below or above the RF input frequency. This feature can be used to eliminate known spurious components in the input signal that can distort the measure- ment, especially in the low frequency range.
Page 586 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool For a wide bandpass, the spurious response flattens the filter edges. The spurious signal can be eliminated by dividing the sweep range into two segments with different LO settings: ● In the low-frequency segment ranging up to the center frequency of the bandpass filter, the frequency of the local oscillator is set to LO <...
Page 587 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool By default it is set to "Use only 1 LO". For frequency-converting DUTs, it is automati- cally set to "Use both LOs". Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SLAMode Use Primed Waves If a (two-tone) Embedded LO Mixer Group Delay Measurements is active, in addition to a and b the analyzer can provide "primed"...
Page 588 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Range Segmented IF Gain is enabled, each sweep segment can be configured separately. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer:GAINcontrol:ALL Drive-port specific settings "Drive Port", "a", "b<j>": Selects the wideband / narrowband IF gain mode for the respective drive port, a and b wave and receivers.
Page 589 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Table 6-6: Related Options Option Functionality Pulse Generator Pulse Modulator Pulse Modulator Pulse Profile Mea- Control surement Trigger Board all ports via Trig Out and – – PuMo In/Out (R&S ZNA-B91) Internal Pulse Mod- all ports –...
Page 590 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool VSE Settings The controls in the "VSE Settings" part of the "Pulse Mod" tab allow you to set up, con- figure and run Chapter 5.7.6.1, "Live Pulse Analysis with R&S VSE", on page 225. Configure VSE ←...
Page 591 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Schematics The "Schematics" button in the "Pulse Modulation" dialog opens a separate window that visualizes the pulse generation and modulation logic. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 16...
Page 592 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool From left to right: ● The master pulse of the internal pulse generators can either be provided internally ("Pulse Period") or externally, via one of the Trigger In connectors. ● The internal pulse modulators can be controlled either via internal pulse generators or externally, via the PuMo In/Out connectors.
Page 593 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool For unsuitable combinations of the pulse and measurement settings, the firmware dis- plays a warning above the diagram, indicating the detection type and a possible desen- sitization loss of sensitivity of the measurement. Master Pulse Settings Pulse Gen.
Page 594 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PERiod Basic Pulse Generator Settings If option R&S ZNA-K7 is not available, the port-related pulse generators can only oper- ate at a fixed duty cycle. Fixed Duty Cycle/Duty Cycle If "Fixed Duty Cycle" is enabled, the analyzer automatically adjusts the pulse width of the the port-related pulse generators to keep the "Duty Cycle"...
Page 595 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Coupled Settings Couples the settings of the port pulse generators, i.e. enforces identical settings for all ports. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:COUPled[:STATe] Pulse Delay/Pulse Width Defines the delay and width of the internally generated pulses. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:DELay [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:WIDTh [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:DELay...
Page 596 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:COUNt [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:STATe [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:STOP Pulse Modulator Control Allows you to control the internal pulse modulators (with options R&S ZNAxx-B4y) and external pulse modulators via PuMo In/Out and Trigger Out (with option R&S ZNA- B91).
Page 597 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool PuMo In If external Pulse Modulator Control is enabled, this setting allows you to select between positive or negative polarity of the "PuMo In" signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:EXTernal:INPut:INVerted[:STATe] Trig. Out Allows you to enable/disable pulse modulator control via the respective "Trig. Out". Note that a Trigger Out that has been previously configured to indicate sweeps, seg- ments or measurement points for this channel, cannot be used for pulse generation.
Page 598 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool 6.13.2.3 VSE Connection Configuration Dialog The controls on the "VSE Connection Configuration" dialog allow you to set up and establish a connection to a local or remote R&S VSE instance. For background information, see Chapter 5.7.6.1, "Live Pulse Analysis with R&S VSE", on page 225.
Page 599 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool If you don't want to connect to a Local VSE, mark the address of your remote target R&S VSE as "Active" and select Start/Connect VSE / Disconnect VSE. Remote command: on page 1068 CONTrol:VSE:ADDRess Set Address Manually/Apply Address Allows you to specify the VISA address of a remote target R&S VSE manually.
Page 600 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Source Coh. On Enables/disables the generation of coherent source signals. If enabled, the main tool bar shows the "Src. Coh." icon, which opens the Source Coherence Dialog. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:CMODe[:STATe] Apply Wave Correction Same function as "Wave Correction"...
Page 601 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:CMODe:OPTimized[:STATe] Defined Phase Coherence Control (table) The controls in the table allow you to activate and define port specific phase settings. The table is enabled, if True Differential Mode is unchecked. The settings only take effect if Source Coherence On is checked.
Page 602 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Phase > Port / Start Phase / Stop Phase ← Imbalance Sweep Settings Configures the phase imbalance sweep: ● "Port" selects the balanced logical port to be swept ● "Start Phase" and "Stop Phase" define the phase difference at the start/stop of each sweep Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:PHASe:LPORt...
Page 603 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.1.1 Overview Panel Shows an overview of the overall calculation flow and provides quick access to the "Offset Embed" functions. Access: Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Overview" Figure 6-31: Offset Embed dock widget: Overview (Calculation Flow) Use one of the buttons to configure the corresponding function.
Page 604 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Active The checkbox in the "Active" column activates/deactivates the configured length and loss parameters for the respective Port (i.e. adds/removes them to/from the calculation flow) without changing the parameter values. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:COMPensation[:STATe] Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd Freq / 2nd Freq for Loss Defines the one-way loss parameters of the transmission line at the selected port.
Page 605 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:COMPensation[:STATe] Displayed Columns Opens a dialog that lets you select between different ways to specify the offset, similar Delay / Electrical Length / Mech. Length on the Offset Tab. 6.14.1.3 Single Ended Panel Allows you to activate or deactivate single ended deembedding/embedding for selected physical ports.
Page 606 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>[: STATe] File Name 1 / Swap Gates The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected (see Single Ended Tab).
Page 607 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Add / Delete Allows you to define the "Port Sets" to whom a deembedding or embedding network can be assigned. The "Add" button opens the "Define Port Set" dialog that allows you to define an addi- tional port set, comprising two or more physical ports.
Page 608 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side). However, it is also possible to instruct the analyzer to assume an "Increasing Port Sequence", i.e. that the low port numbers are on the VNA side.
Page 609 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Balanced Tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote commands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured de-/ embeding for the related balanced port (i.e.
Page 610 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Access: Overview Panel > "Ground Loop" For the "1-Port Data" network type, the required touchstone file can also be selected from here ("..."). This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop Tab softtool tab.
Page 611 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.1.7 Impedance Renormalization Panel This panel provides alternative access to the reference impedance settings (see "Ref- erence Impedance Tab" on page 278). Access: Overview Panel > "Impedance Renor." Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see...
Page 612 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Differential Match Tab softtool tab. Refer to its description of this softtool tab for background information, parameters and additional remote commands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured differential match embedding (i.e.
Page 613 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.2.1 Controls on the Offset Tab Overview This button is available on all "Offset Embed" softtool tabs. It opens the Overview Panel in the Offset Embed Dock Widget. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent offset parameters for all ports.
Page 614 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>[:TIME] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:ELENgth [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:DISTance Permittivity / Velocity Factor Defines the permittivity (ε ) and velocity factor of the dielectric in the transmission line between the reference plane and the DUT. The velocity factor is 1/sqrt(ε ) and is a measure for the velocity of light in a dielectric with permittivity ε...
Page 615 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool If "Adjust Time Gate" is on, the time gate is moved to left (right) when the offset-correc- ted reference plane is moved to the right (left). Its absolute position remains fixed. With this setting, it is possible, e.g., to keep the time gate at the position of the antenna con- nector while the antenna is measured at different length offsets.
Page 616 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Access: ● Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Offset" > "Fixture Compensation..." ● Channel – [Offset Embed] > "One Way Loss" > "Fixture Compensation..." Background Information Refer to Chapter 5.6.1.5, "Fixture Compensation ", on page 179. Ports Selects the ports for whom fixture compensation data shall be acquired.
Page 617 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-33: Measure Fixture dialog: Auto Length (and Loss) To acquire the necessary data, proceed as indicated in the information area. With Prompt for Each Port disabled, "Take" acquires data for all selected ports in one go.
Page 618 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Table 6-7: Direct Compensation data Prompt for Each Port File Type Description disabled One csv trace file per standard, containing reflection traces for all selected ports; see Chap- ter 5.4.2.2, "ASCII (*.csv) Files", on page 139 enabled One 1-port Touchstone file per...
Page 619 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Overview "Overview" on page 613. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent loss parameters for all ports. Remote command: The <PhyPt> numeric suffix in the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:... commands identifies the physical port. Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss "Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd Freq / 2nd Freq for Loss"...
Page 620 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Fixture Compensation... The "Fixture Compensation..." button opens the Fixture Compensation Dialog. Evaluation Range... The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the Evaluation Range Dialog that allows you to restrict the frequency range of auto length (and loss) calculations. 6.14.4 Single Ended Tab Allows you to specify 2-port deembedding/embedding networks for each physical port.
Page 621 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool left = 2 port data file selected for deembedding right = lumped element model selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 553), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out.
Page 622 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:R<Cmp> Select File... "Select File..." is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected. This net- work is defined by its S-parameters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p). No additional parameters are required.
Page 623 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Background Information Chapter 5.6.2.9, "Fixture Modeling and Deembedding", on page 189. Access: Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Single Ended" / "Balanced" > "Run Tool" Figure 6-36: Fixture Modeling Dialog: SFD - Single Ended Ports Figure 6-37: Fixture Modeling Dialog: ISD - Balanced Ports User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 624 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-38: Fixture Modeling Dialog: EZD - Single Ended Ports The fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture; see Chapter 6.14.5.2, "Measure Coupon", on page 625 The tools differ in the available coupon types.
Page 625 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Advanced Settings ... Opens the Advanced Settings dialog of the selected tool. See: ● Chapter 6.14.5.6, "ISD Advanced Settings", on page 631 ● Chapter 6.14.5.7, "SFD Advanced Settings", on page 634 ● Chapter 6.14.5.8, "EZD Advanced Settings", on page 635 Timestamp Filenames...
Page 626 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Coupon Type Selects the coupon type to be measured. The following coupon types are supported: "Sym 2x Thru" ✓ ✓ ✓ "1x Open" ✓ ✓ – "1x Short" – ✓ ✓ "1x Open, 1x Short" ✓...
Page 627 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:FILename Active Before starting to measure the test coupon, use these checkboxes to indicate the physical ports to which it is connected. Table 6-8: Allowed numbers of active ports "Sym 2x Thru"...
Page 628 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool The display will change to show all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA \Embedding. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure Active Before starting to Measure, use these checkboxes to indicate the physical ports to which DUT + test fixture are connected.
Page 629 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool The resulting Touchstone files (S parameters of the lead-ins, the lead-outs, and the de- embedded DUT) are written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA \Embedding. If result files with the same names already exist, you will be asked whether you want to rename or overwrite them.
Page 630 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.5.5 <Deembedding Tool> Errors Dialog If running the related deembedding tool causes errors, a dialog provides additional information: Figure 6-40: EZD error messages Figure 6-41: Delta-L error messages User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 16...
Page 631 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.5.6 ISD Advanced Settings For details see the ISD User Guide. Test Coupons > Insertion Loss Tells the ISD tool about the linearity of the 2xThru test coupon: ● "Linear": linear insertion loss ●...
Page 632 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: on page 879 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:ATTenuation Scaling for Flt Tm ← Lead Ins Overrides the lead-in’s flight time (i.e. its delay) in case the through-trace test coupon is a bit too short or too long. Default is 1.
Page 633 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Ports to Skip ← DUT With Fixture Tells the ISD tool which ports (in the measured DUT + Test Fixture file) shall be skip- ped when the tool is run ● "None" (default): do not skip any ports ●...
Page 634 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Max Freq to Deembed ← Calculations When the test coupon’s return loss is not less than the insertion loss, the maximum fre- quency to deembed together with the proper Insertion Loss setting gives the best accu- racy.
Page 635 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool ● "Ports 1&2 on Left" ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DIFFcfg Total Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the Test Fixture ●...
Page 636 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.6 Port Sets Tab Selects transformation networks for deembedding/embedding arbitrary port sets, defines their parameters, assigns them to a port set and enables embedding. Use the complementary dock widget to create the required port sets and to activate or deactivate dembedding/embedding for selected port sets (see Chapter 6.14.1.4, "Port Sets...
Page 637 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool The port set number, i.e. the number at the beginning of each "Port Set" item, corre- sponds to the position of the port set in the Port Sets Panel. Remote command: The port set number corresponds to the <ListId> numeric suffix in the port set de-/ embedding commands;...
Page 638 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files. When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
Page 639 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-42: Offset Embed > Balanced softtool left = 4 port data file selected for de-/embedding right = other network selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
Page 640 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Network The graphical list contains all available 4-port networks (see Chapter 5.6.2.4, "Circuit Models for 4-Port Networks", on page 184). symbol selects "no network" and disables deembedding/embedding for the selected balanced port. The 4-port data network (symbol "D1" only) is defined by means of an s4p file (see D2).
Page 641 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side). However, it is also possible to instruct the analyzer to assume an "Increasing Port Sequence", i.e. that the low port numbers are on the VNA side.
Page 642 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool multiple port groups (DUTs) are configured and Ground Loop per Port Group enabled, use the dock widget to select the port group whose ground loop network shall be configured. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.6.2.7, "Ground Loop De-/Embedding", on page 188.
Page 643 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:L CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:R CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>: PARameters:G CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:L CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:R CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G Select File... "Select File..." is enabled as long as the "1-Port Data" network is selected. This net- work is defined by its S-parameters stored in a one-port Touchstone file (*.s1p).
Page 644 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.9 Differential Match Tab Allows you to specify a 2-port embedding network for the differential mode of a bal- anced port. Such a network is either defined ● via its S-parameter stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p) or ●...
Page 645 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Logical Port Logical analyzer port, as defined in the "Balanced Ports" configuration. The transfor- mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit; the DUT ports are on the right side. You can define independ- ent embedding networks for all balanced ports.
Page 646 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Offset > Calculate after De-/Embed. Changes the position of the "Offset" calculation in the "Offset Embed" calculation chain. If unchecked (default), the offset is calculated before de-/embedding. If checked, it is calculated after de-/embedding. = Default offset calculation Bottom = Offset calculation after de-/embedding (GUI mockup) Remote command:...
Page 647 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.11 Delta-L Tab The controls on the "Delta-L" tab allow you to set up and perform a Delta-L PCB char- acterization. The "Delta-L" tab is only visible if option R&S ZNA-K231 is installed on the instrument. Chapter 5.7.15, "Delta-L 4.0 PCB Characterization", on page 239.
Page 648 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Method Selects the Delta-L+ characterization method to be used. For background information, Delta-L 4.0 PCB Characterization. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:METHod Measurements "Method 1L" handles single-ended and balanced measurement results differently. If this Method is used, you have to select one of them. "Method 2L"...
Page 649 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Frequencies Delta-L computes the uncertainty in the loss-per-inch calculation at specified frequen- cies. The "Frequencies" table is pre-populated with the frequencies recommended by Intel. If you want to enter your own values, uncheck "Use Default Frequencies" and select "Edit User Frequencies..."...
Page 650 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool The default "Minimum" is the standard Delta-L start frequency of 10 MHz. The default "Maximum" is 20 GHz. Buttons are available to set "Maximum" to the standard Delta-L stop frequencies of 20 GHz and 40 GHz (if within the instrument's frequency range), and to the instrument's maximum frequency.
Page 651 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement The settings in the "1L Measurement"/"2L Measurement"/"3L Measurement" sections configure and control the measurement of the 1st/2nd/3rd line. The "1L Measurement" is always enabled. Depending on the selected "Method" on page 648, the "2L Measurement"...
Page 652 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Length ← 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement Specifies the length of the related line. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:LENGth Runs the AITT-DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta-L settings. The firmware enables this action when sufficient data for the required lines are availa- ble (either loaded or measured).
Page 653 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-43: Method 2L results Markers are added to the smoothed traces at the analysis frequencies. The marker name indicates to which analysis pair it belongs and the computed Delta-L uncertainty. Method 1L For "Method 1L", the Delta-L diagram displays the following traces: ●...
Page 654 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool Markers "DeltaL1..." are added to the"StdDev" trace at the analysis frequencies. The marker names indicate the computed Delta-L uncertainties. 6.15 File Print Softtool The "File Print" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data. Access: System –...
Page 655 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool 6.15.1 Recall Sets Tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. It can be stored to a VNA recall set file (*.znxml|*.znx). For background information, see Chapter 5.1.2, "Recall Sets",...
Page 656 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool 6.15.1.1 Basic Recall Set Functions To create a recall set based on the current analyzer configuration, select Save. To open an existing recall set, select Open Recall..To create an additional setup, select New.
Page 657 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool 6.15.2 Favorites Tab The "Favorites" tab allows you to manage a list of favorite recall sets. A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e. ● if the recall set is modified, then the modified recall set is loaded the next time the favorite is selected ●...
Page 658 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool Favorites combo-box / Remove Use the "Favorites" combo-box to select the favorite to be removed from the list, then select "Remove" 6.15.3 Print Tab The buttons on the "Print" tab allow you to send the diagrams of the active setup to an external printer, to a file or to the clipboard.
Page 659 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool Note that the diagram content to be copied can be configured in the Content Tab > "Print Charts" group of the "Printer Setup" dialog. E.g., if you select "All diagrams on their own page" there, then only the content of the active diagram is copied to clip- board.
Page 660 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool The selected item in the "Print Charts" group specifies how the diagram area of the active recall set is printed. Currently the following options are offered: "No Diagram at all", "Active Diagram only", "All diagrams on one page", "All diagrams on their own page"...
Page 661 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Tip: The printer settings are not affected by a preset of the R&S ZNA. Use the "Remote" tab in the System Config Dialog to restore default settings. 6.15.5 Trace Data Tab Chapter 6.5.11, "Trace Data Tab", on page 386.
Page 662 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Access: System – [DUT] 6.16.1 DUT Centric Wizard The "DUT Centric Wizard" guides you through the measurement setup for certain fun- damental DUT types. Access: System – [DUT] > "DUT Centric Wizard" The "DUT Centric Wizard" lets you proceed with the followng steps: 1.
Page 663 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool 4. Select the measurements to be performed. At this point, the wizard knows how many additional channels are required, and how they should be set up per default. 5. Adjust the default channel settings to your needs. 6.
Page 664 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager" to persist new/modified mixer settings to the DUT man- ager when you proceed to the next step of the "DUT Centric Wizard". If a DUT with the same name exists, you are asked whether you want to overwrite the existing DUT con- figuration, or to create a DUT with a different name.
Page 665 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Figure 6-44: Mixer/VNA connections Figure 6-45: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of analyzer ports and the number of independent sources (on the VNA and connected external generators). User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 16...
Page 666 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Measurement Selection The "Measurement Selection" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to select the mixer properties to be measured. Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard"...
Page 667 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 666 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements ● one channel for group delay measurements Summary The "Summary"...
Page 668 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you finish the "DUT Centric Wizard" with "Calibrate Newly Created Channels" selected, then, after creating the required (setup and) channels, the FW will proceed with suitable calibrations. 6.16.1.2 Guided Amplifier Setup Define DUT The "Define DUT"...
Page 669 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Similar to the Amplifier Configuration Dialog of the Manager. Load from DUT Manager Use "Load from DUT Manager" to load a previously configured mixer from the DUT manager. This will open a dialog that allows you to select the DUT to be loaded: Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager"...
Page 670 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool DUT/VNA Connections The "DUT/VNA Connections" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard" allows you to configure the RF connections between VNA and DUT. Figure 6-46: Mixer/VNA connections User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 16...
Page 671 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Figure 6-47: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of analyzer ports and the number of independent sources (on the VNA and connected external generators). Measurement Selection The "Measurement Selection" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to select the amplifier properties to be measured.
Page 672 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard" based on the properties of the DUT, the RF topology and the selected measurements. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 673 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 666, either one or two channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" ●...
Page 674 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you finish the "DUT Centric Wizard" with "Calibrate Newly Created Channels" selected, then, after creating the required (setup and) channels, the FW will proceed with suitable calibrations. 6.16.2 DUT Manager Dialog The DUT manager allows you to create, configure, and manage DUTs.
Page 675 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool 6.16.2.1 Controls on the DUT Manager Dialog Filter by DUT Type Use this filter to focus on DUTs of a particular type. With a particular DUT type selected, the table area only shows DUTs of this type and the "Add"...
Page 676 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Copy This button is only active, if exactly one row is selected in the table area. It allows you to copy the selected DUT. Delete This button is only active, if at least one row is selected in the table area. It allows you to delete the selected DUTs.
Page 677 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Access: DUT Manager Dialog > "Edit..." with a DUT of type "Amplifier" selected 6.16.2.3 Mixer Configuration Dialog The "Mixer Configuration" dialog allows you to set up the fundamental properties of a mixer. Access: DUT Manager Dialog >...
Page 678 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Most of the mixer properties are straight-forward Embedded LO Select "Embedded LO" if in the related mixer measurement the LO cannot be provided by the VNA or a connected external generator. Setting this flag makes the LO drive power range read-only.
Page 679 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool The "External Tools" application is always available, other applications are provided by certain software options. 6.17.1 External Tools Application The "External Tools" application gives access to pre-installed and user-defined external tools. Access: System – [Applic] > "External Tools" GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts.
Page 680 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Tool 3 ... Tool 8 Allows you to add your own external tools. Any new shortcut in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\External Tools direc- tory replaces one of the buttons. Title and Bar Task Bar On Displays or hides the title bar and the task bar across the bottom of the screen. Typi- cally you can use the task bar to change between the VNA application and other exter- nal tools.
Page 681 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.1 TDR Setup Tab The "TDR Setup" tab allows you to set up the measurement for the time domain trans- formation, which is then used to analyze the time domain behavior of the DUT (eye diagram, rise time, skew, ...).
Page 682 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Opens the "Balanced Ports" dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports (see Chapter 6.2.2.5, "Balanced Ports Dialog", on page 276) ● "Stimulus..." Opens the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog that allows to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation ●...
Page 683 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Figure 6-48: Port Topology step The port configurations are the same as the ones offered on the "Predefined Config" tab of the Balanced Ports Dialog. Step 2: Stimulus Settings The "Stimulus Settings" step gives access to the basic settings of the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog and allows you to select the time domain measurements to be per-...
Page 684 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Once you have selected a measurement, you can finish the wizard and proceed to the Fixture Compensation Dialog using the "Finish with Fixture Compensation" button. 6.17.2.3 TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog This dialog allows you to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation and subsequent TDR simulation.
Page 685 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Controls in the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog Figure 6-49: TDR Stimulus Settings dialog The "TDR Stimulus Settings" dialog offers basic settings. Instead of specifying the sweep parameters directly, they are derived from time domain properties of the DUT. After the settings are made, the resulting sweep parameters are shown in the dialog.
Page 686 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool The velocity factor is a measure for the velocity of an electromagnetic wave in a dielec- tric with permittivity ε , relative to its velocity in a vacuum (velocity factor < 1). Permittivity and velocity factor are coupled parameters, i.e. setting one of them deter- mines the other.
Page 687 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool For additional settings see Chapter 6.5.5, "Time Domain Tab", on page 367. Source/Receiver Settings The "RF Power" is the output power of the R&S ZNA, "IF Bandwidth" and "Average Factor" determine the operation of the related R&S ZNA receiver. For a description and related remote control commands see Chapter 6.9, "Pwr Bw Avg Softtool",...
Page 688 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Advanced Settings... If the active trace is an eye diagram, the "Advanced Settings..." button opens the Advanced Settings Dialog that allows in-depth configuration of the simulated digital sig- nal generator and receiver. Display Measurements If the active trace is an eye diagram, the "Display Measurements"...
Page 689 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool The following measurement results can be selectively enabled/disabled: ● "Basic" – Eye Minimum, Eye Maximum, Eye Base, Eye Top, Eye Mean, Eye Ampli- tude, Eye Height, Eye Width For PAM signals (see "Modulation" on page 691) Eye Height and Eye Width are not available.
Page 690 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:EYE:MEASurements 6.17.2.5 Eye Diagram Dialog Allows basic configuration of the eye diagram simulation. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Eye Diag" > "Eye Diagram..." For advanced configuration of the eye diagram simulation see Chapter 6.17.2.6, "Advanced Settings Dialog",...
Page 691 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Length Length of the bit stream. For a user defined Bit Stream the length can be specified in terms of bits, Kibits (2^10 bits), Mibits (2^20 bits), Gibits (2^30 bits) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:PRBS CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS Load Bit Stream A user-defined bit stream can be loaded from file and is repeated until the configured Length...
Page 692 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:MODulation High Level / Low Level Defines the highest/lowest (nominal) voltage level of the multilevel signal that is used to generate the related eye diagram. Modulation type can only be changed in the advanced "Generator Settings" dialog (see "Generator"...
Page 693 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool "Trace Cumulative Low Color" is the color that is used for the occurrence value 1, "Trace Cumulative High Color" is the color that is used for the most frequent occurren- ces. No occurrence (value 0) is always displayed fully transparent with the background being visible.
Page 694 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Generator The "Generator Settings" dialog gives full access to the "virtual" signal generator of the related eye diagram simulation. Most of the settings are also available in the Eye Dia- gram Dialog. Access: "Generator" button in the Advanced Settings Dialog This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis...
Page 695 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool The scrambler is a linear feedback shift register (LFSR) implementing the polynomial G(X) = X^16+X^5+X^4+X^3+1. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:SCRambler Emphasis The "Emphasis" dialog allows you to introduce a pre-emphasis filter to the digital signal simulated for the eye diagram measurement. This, together with Equalization, may be used to compensate for the signal integrity degradations caused by the DUT.
Page 696 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Va Vb Vc Vd In dB the pre- and post cursors are defined as: ● Pre Cursor = 20 log ( Vd / Vc ) ● Post 1 Cursor = 20 log ( Vb / Va ) ●...
Page 697 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:POST<1|2> Jitter The "Define Eye Jitter" dialog allows you to add jitter to the digital signal simulated for the eye diagram measurement. Access: "Jitter" button in the Advanced Settings Dialog This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only.
Page 698 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:RANDom CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:RANDom:STDDeviation Periodic This type of jitter is determined by a sine wave whose amplitude ("Periodic Magni- tude"), frequency ("Periodic Frequency") and phase ("Periodic Phase") is specified by the user. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:PERiodic CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:MAGNitude CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency...
Page 699 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Each value describes the jitter for a symbol transition (even when the current and the previous symbols are the same). The jitter value is implicitly given in the unit [s] and denotes the delta between the time of the ideally expected transition (given by the data rate) and the actual one.
Page 700 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Measurement / Topolgy "Measurement / Topology" on page 690 DC Value "DC Value" on page 372 Mode Allows you to switch temporarily between the real DUT (with measured frequency response) and an ideal one (with flat frequency response).
Page 701 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Similar to the usage of emphasis the equalization targets to improve the signal quality at the receiver end of the transmission system. The building block "Equalize" simulates a continuous-time linear equalizer (CTLE) which is typically realized as an analog cir- cuit in receivers.
Page 702 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.7 Eye Mask Test Tab If the active trace is represented as an eye diagram, the "Eye Mask Test" tab allows you to set up an eye mask for it, to enable testing against this mask and to export the test results.
Page 703 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:DATA? CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL? Mask Fail Beep This checkbox determines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on mask failures. Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
Page 704 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.8 Define Mask Configuration Dialog Allows you to set up the mask the simulated eye diagram shall be tested against. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Eye Mask Test" > "Define Mask..." There are three mask areas that can be set up for the eye diagram test: center poly- gon, top rectangle, and bottom rectangle.
Page 705 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Figure 6-54: Center polygon setup: hexagon Figure 6-55: Center polygon setup: rectangle The polygon is centered at the Mask Center. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical Top/Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles. Both rectangles are horizontally centered at the Mask Center and also their vertical off-...
Page 706 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Test Settings Allows you to set the absolute or relative number of mask violations that will result in a mask fail condition. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:CONDition CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE Save / Load Mask Configuration Opens a dialog that allows to save/load the mask test configuration to/from a 7bit ASCII file (*.mask).
Page 707 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.9 Rise Time Tab The "Rise Time" tab allows you to enable and configure the Rise Time Measurement. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Rise Time" Access: [Applic] key or "Application > Rise Time" menu Rise Time Enables/disables the rise time measurement.
Page 708 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:DATA? 6.17.2.10 Skew Tab The "Skew" tab allows you to enable and configure the Skew Measurement. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Skew" Skew Enables/disables the skew measurement between the active trace and the Reference Trace The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for...
Page 709 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:STATe Reference Trace Selects the reference trace for the skew measurement. Note that the reference trace must be in the same channel as the active trace. Skew for additional conditions on both the active and the reference trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:TARGet Skew Position...
Page 710 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP Global Check, TTL1 Pass, TTL2 Pass Chapter 6.6.1, "Limit Test Tab",...
Page 711 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.13 X Axis Tab The "X Axis" tab allows you to define the x axis scaling of the active diagram. The scal- ing logic is the same as for all other diagram types, see Chapter 6.4, "Scale Softtool", on page 345.
Page 712 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.2.7, "Distance-to-Fault Measurements", on page 202. 6.17.3.1 Controls on the Distance to Fault Tab The controls on the "Distance to Fault" tab allow you to enable and configure a stan- dard Distance to Fault (DtF) measurement.
Page 713 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool If the active trace is a reflection trace S , the analyzer firmware assumes that the DUT is connected to port p=i. Otherwise it assumes that the DUT is connected to port p=2. When activating "Distance to Fault", the analyzer firmware ●...
Page 714 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool If "Auto Number of Points" actually modifies the Number of Points, a tooltip is dis- played: The required number of points depends on: ● the frequency span Δf = f – f (see "Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center stop start Frequency / Span Frequency"...
Page 715 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Select "Available Cable Types..." to access the list of predefined and user-defined cable types (see Chapter 6.17.3.2, "Available Cable Types... Dialog", on page 716). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect Fault Limit Check Enables/disables checking the current "Distance to Fault" trace for spikes above the given Fault Limit (red line).
Page 716 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool ● When the "Fault Limit" is modified, the new "Fault Limit" replaces other limit lines (see Chapter 6.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines Dialog", on page 400) ● This field is only enabled, if Fault Limit Check is active.
Page 717 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool For predefined cables, the table is read-only. Access: Available Cable Types... Dialog > "Attenuation" column > ... Given the specified attenuation values the R&S ZNA calculates the attenuation factor at the center of the channel's sweep range and corrects the impulse response trace using this attenuation factor Attenuation (f center The frequency dependence can be defined in two alternative ways:...
Page 718 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe 6.17.3.3 Fault List Dock Widget The "Fault List" dock widget allows you to explore and save all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Access: [Trace] > "Distance to Fault" > "Fault List..." Figure 6-58: Fault List Dock Widget Fault Table The displays a list of all peaks that violate the active...
Page 719 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool The table displays the faults of the active trace (in case it is a Distance to Fault trace) . Export to File... ← Contents Opens a dialog that allows to export the (filtered) content of the fault list to an ASCII file with configurable "Field Separator"...
Page 720 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool 6.18.1 Diagram Tab Selects a diagram as the active diagram, defines a title, deletes or adds diagrams and arranges them on the screen. Many of the functions are unavailable if the active recall set contains only one diagram. Related settings Use the icons in the toolbar to add diagrams and traces.
Page 721 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Add Trace + Diagram Creates a diagram and a trace which is displayed in the new diagram. The trace is cre- ated with the channel settings of the previous active trace but with default trace set- tings.
Page 722 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Show Title Displays or hides the title area of the active diagram. This property can only be set if Title is non-empty. If "Title" is empty, the title area is always hidden Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe[:STATe] Overlay All Places all traces in a single diagram area which is maximized to occupy the whole...
Page 723 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagram areas, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Split" tab. Remote command: No command; display configuration only. 6.18.2 Split Tab Arranges multiple diagrams on the screen.
Page 724 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool ● "Split All" on page 722 Dual Split / Triple Split / Quad Split Splits the diagram area into two (three / four) diagrams and distributes the traces among the diagrams. Traces with different format and channel settings (e.g. Cartesian and complex diagrams) are separated, if possible.
Page 725 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool If the selected number of "Diagrams" exceeds the number of traces, some of the new diagrams are created with a default trace. Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagrams, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Diagram"...
Page 726 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool 6.18.3.1 Controls on the Config Tab Color Scheme Controls the colors in the diagram areas. Color schemes are global settings and apply to all active recall sets. The following predefined color schemes are optimized for the analyzer screen and for color hardcopies, respectively: ●...
Page 727 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool "User Define..." opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes, changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements. Chapter 6.18.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 728. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:COLor Hide Sensitive Information Unmasks or masks all stimulus value occurrences in the VNA GUI for the current recall set.
Page 728 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Info Window Shows/hides the Info Window Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow[:STATe] Font Size Scales the fonts in the diagrams. The scaling affects the trace and channel lists, and the info fields. Remote command: DISPlay:RFSize Auto Adjust Windows...
Page 729 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Element Selects the screen element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
Page 730 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Limit Test > Colorize Trace when Failed Assigns a different trace color to failed trace segments. The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
Page 731 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Remote command: DISPlay:CMAP:MARKer[:STATe] General > Black White Scheme / Line Styles Scheme / Light Scheme Modifies the user color scheme, in particular the trace and channel lines, in a prede- fined way. As an alternative, select predefined color schemes; see "Color Scheme"...
Page 732 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool If a trace is hidden, then its marker and bandfilter search info is also hidden in the "Info Window". Info Window Configuration Dialog The "Info Window Configuration" dialog allows you to select the markers and Display Elements of a Diagram results to be displayed in the...
Page 733 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Figure 6-60: Content selection: bandfilter search info fields Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] DISPlay:IWINdow:BFILter[:STATe] 6.18.4 View Bar Tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
Page 734 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Hard Key Panel Toggles the visibility of the "Hard Key Panel". For background information, see Chapter 4.3.2.6, "Hardkey Panel", on page 38. The "Hard Key Panel" can also be closed via the "X" button in its top right corner. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:HKEY[:STATe] Title Bar Task Bar...
Page 735 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool ● Lock screen – all control elements are locked. Pressing any front panel key on the analyzer (or sending SYSTem:TSLock OFF) re-enables touchscreen control. Remote command: SYSTem:TSLock 6.19 Setup Softtool The "Setup" softtool allows you to define various system-related settings, to manage global resources, to get system information and to execute service functions.
Page 736 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool ● "Service Function...": Service Function Dialog Language Selects the language of the graphical user interface. A message box indicates that the vector network analyzer application needs to be restarted to activate a different lan- guage.
Page 737: Table Of Contents
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool ● Presets Tab......................737 ● Calibration Tab...................... 738 ● User Interface Tab....................741 ● Messages Tab....................... 743 ● Channel Bits Tab....................744 ● Advanced Tab....................... 745 ● Power Tab......................747 ● Recovery Tab......................750 Presets Tab Specifies the behavior of the R&S ZNA upon a preset.
Page 738: Calibration Tab
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Global Settings The two buttons reset all directory settings (e.g. the directories for storing trace data, limit lines, calibration data...) and all settings in the "Printer Setup" dialog to default val- ues. See Chapter 6.15.4, "Printer Setup Dialog", on page 659.
Page 739 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Auto Power Setting for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to -10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active. Applying this source power to the ports of the calibration unit ensures best accuracy of the automatic calibration.
Page 740 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Note that for this to work, the port assignments must have a star topology, with a "Common Port" set using [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CPORt on page 1211. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:MCONnect Same Sweep Setup for All Standards Selects one of two alternative calibration methods: ●...
Page 741: User Interface Tab
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Interpolation is used if the sweep points during the measurement differ from the sweep points during calibration (state label "Cal int"). Compared to the default linear interpola- tion, the "Higher Order" (cubic spline) interpolation can slightly slow down the mea- surement but can provide better results, at least if the measured trace shows no signifi- cant noise or discontinuities.
Page 742 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool / Transparent Info Fields / Show Sweep Symbols The buttons switch the instrument messages, acoustic messages, transparent info fields for markers and trace statistics, and sweep symbols on or off. ● Transparent info fields do not hide an underlying trace. ●...
Page 743: Messages Tab
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Note: If your instrument is equipped with option R&S ZNA-K19, 1 mHz Frequency Resolution, set "Decimal Places" of unit "Hz" to 12 to utilize the high frequency resolu- tion. Remote command: Units Prefix Sets the unit prefix for frequencies (Base unit: Hz) to kilo (k), mega (M), giga (G) or tera (T) or lets the R&S ZNA select the appropriate prefix ("Auto"...
Page 744: Channel Bits Tab
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Show Info Messages / Show Warning Messages / Show Error Messages Selectively disables/enables display of information popups for the related event type. If information popups are globally switched off (Show Instrument Messages unchecked), these buttons are disabled. However, their checked state is memorized. Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay:INFO SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay:WARNings...
Page 745: Advanced Tab
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool The decimal values have the following effect: ● 0 means that no output signals are enabled at any of the pins 8, 9, 10, 11 and 16, 17, 18, 19. ● 1 enables the output signal at pin 8. The signal is switched on while a measure- ment sweep is running in the selected channel.
Page 746 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband (see "Bandfilter Search" on page 88). If "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" is checked, the geometric mean of the lower band edge and upper band edge frequencies is used, otherwise their arithmetic mean.
Page 747: Power Tab
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Skip Separator Lines ← Touchstone Export Options If checked, the content parts are no longer separated by blank lines. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:SSEParator TTL Pass Default Values Defines the default values of TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass for new traces.
Page 748 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Power Keep Settling Delay Auto Reduce End Measurement Restart Sweep Time Figure 6-61: Power control at sweep end in Single Sweep mode (power sweep) Note: By default, at sweep end the output power of the first measurement point is restored ("Auto"...
Page 749 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Settling Delay / Reset Delay ← Power Reduction at Sweep End Power Mode at Sweep End is set to "Reduce" or "Keep", the "Settling Delay" defines the time between Restart Sweep request and sweep start. See Figure 6-61 for an illus- tration.
Page 750: Recovery Tab
® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: SYSTem:AGC:GLOBal:METHod Recovery Tab Provides a single function "Boot into Recovery Screen" that allows you reboot the instrument and launch the "R&S Recovery Environment". From there you can restore the original system image (including operating system and firmware). Chapter 11.2, "System Recovery", on page 1541.
Page 751 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Print... Allows you to print the contents of the open tab. Opens a "Print Preview" dialog for printer and paper setup. Create R&S Support Information Saves the current selftest results to a zipped report file you can send to R&S Support for fault diagnosis;...
Page 752 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Options Tab Shows the installed software and hardware options. You can also enable additional software options using the option key supplied with the option. Proceed according to the instructions in the dialog. For an overview of options, refer to Chapter 5.7, "Optional Extensions and Accesso- ries", on page 193.
Page 753 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Software Option Info Software options are listed with their name and description, the option key and key type, and the activation and expiration date (if applicable). Remote command: DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? Hardware Tab Gives an overview of the analyzer's hardware configuration and basic hardware-related instrument settings.
Page 754 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Selftest Tab Allows to run an automatic selftest on the analyzer, and to displays its results. Check "Show Details" to see the detailed test results. Error Log Tab Contains a chronological record of errors that occurred in the current and in previous sessions (see Chapter 10.1, "Errors during Firmware Operation",...
Page 755 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool For each sweep with at least one lost trigger event, a log entry is created. The time- stamp of an entry indicates the end time of the related sweep. Reload Lost Trigger Log While the "Lost Trigger" tab is open, the display is not refreshed automatically. Use "Reload Lost Trigger Log"...
Page 756 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Password Enter a password here to activate the required service level. Remote command: SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable] Service Function Identifier of the service function in "dotted textual" (example: sw.common.mem- ory_usage) or "dotted decimal" (example: 0.1.18.0) representation. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction 6.19.2 Freq.
Page 757 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Reference Source Selects the internal or an external reference clock signal for synchronization. "Internal" The analyzer synchronizes to its internal reference oscillator. The synchronized internal 10 MHz reference clock is also made avail- able at the rear panel Reference Out BNC connector. In addition, a synchronized 100 MHz reference signal can be provided at the Refer- ence In/Out SMA connector (see "Reference I/O (SMA) >...
Page 758 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Reference Clock Source "Reference Out (BNC)" "Internal" 10 MHz "External (BNC)" 10 MHz "External (SMA)" Ext Frequency Specifies the frequency of the external reference clock signal at Reference In. Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency Reference I/O (SMA) > Out Defines whether a 100 MHz reference clock signal is output to the Reference In/Out SMA connector.
Page 759 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool 6.19.3.1 Controls on the Remote Settings Tab IP Address Displays the current IP4 address of the R&S ZNA. By default, the analyzer is config- ured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration (DHCP) and obtain all IP address informa- tion automatically.
Page 760 If the DEFAULT language is activated, the factory ID string Rohde&Schwarz,ZNA<Max. Freq>-<Ports>Port,<Order and Serial No>,<FW_Ver- sion> (e.g. Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,1.50.2.19) is set. The option string is a comma-separated list of all installed software and hardware options. The bit order for transferred binary data is swapped (FORMat:BORDer SWAPped).
Page 761 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool ● "Auto-Align Logical Ports" determines the logical port creation logic. If enabled (default), logical ports are aligned and must be set from low to high port (which was the only possibility prior to firmware V1.91). If set to disabled, new ports can be created freely, like in manual operation.
Page 762 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool 6.19.4.1 Controls on the Power Meter Tab The buttons in the "Power Meter" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Power Meters...", see Chapter 6.19.4.2, "External Power Meters Dialog", on page 762 ● "Power Meter Config...", see Chapter 6.19.4.3, "External Power Meter Config Dia- log", on page 766...
Page 763 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1. Connect the power meter to your R&S ZNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the power meter is connected via LAN, enable LAN Detection 3.
Page 764 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: Configured Devices Table with all power meters in use with their properties. Except for the auto-detected Known Devices, to appear in the table of "Configured Devices" a power sensor/meter must have been configured manually using Device.
Page 765 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool LAN Detection Activate "LAN Detection" to include the LAN interface in the autodetection sequence (see Scan Instruments). Note: "LAN detection" only works for external devices on the IP subnet with the R&S ZNA. As a prerequisite, the R&S ZNA must accept incoming connections on UDP port 2473. If necessary, add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings.
Page 766 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Table 6-9: Interface types for external power meters and address formats Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector) VXI-11 <IpAddress> Full VISA resource string: for example 10.11.12.13 TCPIP[board]::<Address>[::INSTR] SOCKET <IpAddress>::<PortNo> LAN connection with pure TCP/IP protocol; refer to your VISA user documentation.
Page 767 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Deembed Two-Port (All Channels) Reads and modifies the state of the built-in S-parameter correction that is available on certain R&S®NRP-Z power sensors. See Application Note 1GP70 "Using S-Parame- ters with R&S®NRP-Z Power Sensors" for background information. This Application Note is available on the Rohde &...
Page 768 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool The configuration of a new external generator involves the following steps: 1. Connect the generator to your R&S ZNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB inter- face. 2. If the generator is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection" 3.
Page 769 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: n.a. Configured Devices Table with all generators in use with their properties. The properties of manually config- ured generators ("Add Device", opens the "Add External Generator" dialog) may be changed in the dialog. The following generator properties are not defined in the "Add External Generator"...
Page 770 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments" will send an identification query (*IDN?), causing the analyzer to close the "External Generators"...
Page 771 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool If an instrument is connected to the R&S ZNA, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ● "Identify" sends an identification query ("IDN?") to the specified device address in order to identify the type and serial number of the connected generator and select an appropriate driver file.
Page 772 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool The buttons on the "Frequency Converter" tab open the following dialogs ● "Frequency Converter..." opens a dialog that allows you to define the "Converter Topology", i.e. which converters are used an how they are connected to the R&S ZNA.
Page 773 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Converter Type Selects the type of the converter that is connected to the related VNA port. "None" No converter connected to this port ZCxxx<Serial If a converter R&S ZCxxx is connected via USB, it is auto-detected by #>...
Page 774 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool "Port " Use a VNA port that is not used as converter port as the LO source. Because this VNA port must be driven by another internal source than the converter port, this selection is not available for 2-port VNAs. "Gen "...
Page 775 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Initially a set of preconfigured converter types is available, mainly comprising the leg- acy converter models R&S ZVA-Zxxx(E). To define your own converter types, proceed as follows: 1. Use "Add" to create a converter type with default properties or use "Copy" to dupli- cate the properties of the converter type whose tab is currently selected.
Page 776 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Type The name of the converter type. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:CATalog? [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:DEFine Defines the fixed IF frequency of the converter type. Remote command: on page 1169 [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:IFRequency Converter Port: Start Freq./Stop Freq. Defines the start and stop frequency of the (converter port of the) converter type. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:FREQuency Source: Multiplicator...
Page 777 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:DEFine Delete Deletes the converter type whose tab is currently selected. Only user-defined converter types can be deleted. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:DELete 6.19.6.3 Default Cable and Splitter Losses Dialog After the converter ports have been set up in the Converter Configuration Dialog, you can configure the converter port-specific cable and splitter losses and slope factors.
Page 778 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: n.a. Apply to all channels in all setups Use "Apply to all channels in all setups" to write the Cable & Splitter Loss Slope values to the Port Power Offset Slope channel settings of the respective ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:GENerator<Gen>:OFFSet...
Page 779 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool User Control File Directory Power Control method "User", browse for the folder containing the leveling dataset. Only a folder containing suitable leveling data for the selected Converter Type accepted. Remote command: SOURce:POWer<PhyPt>:CONVerter:TRANsfer:PATH Generic Control File Power Control method "Generic", browse for an arbitrary leveling dataset file.
Page 780 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool ● Redefined physical ports are global, persistent settings, i.e. they are valid for all recall sets. A [Preset] does not reset the physical port configuration. ● Redefining physical ports causes a factory reset. a wave, b wave, Source Define a physical port by assigning its reference receiver, measurement receiver and generator, respectively.
Page 781 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool 2. Use "Generic Device Config..." to open the External Generic Device Config Dialog, which allows you to define the channel-specific command sequences that are sent to the configured devices. 6.19.8.1 External Generic Devices Dialog The "External Generic Devices"...
Page 782 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool To control external devices via GPIB, the pre-installed RS Visa library (visa32.dll) must be replaced by the NI Visa library. Known Devices/Address Filter/Clear Table with all VISA-capable devices that the analyzer detects to be online (i.e. connec- ted and switched on).
Page 783 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: Add Device Opens the "Add Generic Device" dialog that allows you to configure the connection to a generic device that was not auto-detected. The configured device is added to the list of "Configured Devices". The connection is defined with the following settings: ●...
Page 784 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector) USB-VISA <ManID>::<ProdID>::<SerialNo> 2733 (0x0AAD) is the manufacturer ID of Rohde & Schwarz. e.g. 0x0AAD::0x0047::100098 The serial number is device-specific. LAN or USB Other Interface-specific, e.g. for SOCKET: Use complete VISA resource string.
Page 785 ® GUI Reference R&S Help Softtool ● The recall set only stores the paths of the command files, but not their contents. When loading the recall set, the referenced command files must be available at the same locations. ● In case loading a command file fails, the Error Log provides more information.
Page 786 ® GUI Reference R&S Preset Softtool Open the Info Dialog for full information about the instrument. 6.21 Preset Softtool Access: ● System – [Preset] ● Menu bar: "Channel" > "Preset" > "Select Preset" > (various menu items) 6.21.1 Select Preset Tab The controls on the "Select Preset"...
Page 787 ® GUI Reference R&S Preset Softtool More preset options are available via the Presets Tab of the "System Config" dialog. Preset Executes the configured preset action. See "Normal / RF Off / Normal, GUI, Ext Setup / <File Name>" on page 787. Normal / RF Off / Normal, GUI, Ext Setup / <File Name>...
Page 788 ® GUI Reference R&S Preset Softtool Remote command: n.a. Save Preset File... Lets you save the current setup to a recall set file and to select it as user preset file one go. Opens a standard "Save File" dialog. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<RecallSetFile>...
Page 789 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control 7 Remote Control This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control, a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments, and the descrip- tion of the analyzer's remote control concept. For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument, complemented by compre- hensive program examples, refer to Chapter 8, "Command...
Page 790 2-port R&S ZNB67: 0x0253 ● 4-port R&S ZNB67: 0x0254 Hence a possible resource string for the 4-port R&S ZNA26 is USB1::0x0AAD:: 0x0199::100067::INSTR. 7.1.2 Starting a Remote Control Session A remote control program must open a connection to the analyzer (using VISA func- tionality), before it can send commands to the analyzer and receive device responses (e.g.
Page 791 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control The following tools can make remote control more comfortable and faster: ● Various software tools provide an easy-to-use graphical user interface for remote control. An example is the "GPIB Explorer" (also termed "IECWIN32") which is pre- installed on the analyzer.
Page 792 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control ● RSIB, VISA (TCPIP) and VISA (HSLIP) (for LAN connection, requires an appropri- ate IP or local host address); see Chapter 11.1.3.1, "Assigning an IP Address", on page 1537. ● VISA (USB) Depending on the instrument model and variant, specify the resource string as USB1::0x0AAD::<Device ID>::<Serial>::INSTR (see Chapter 7.1.1,...
Page 793 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control 7.1.4 Switchover to Remote Control On power-up, the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be oper- ated via the front panel controls. The instrument is switched to remote control when it receives a command from the controller.
Page 794 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly. The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when triggered by the remote control command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ONCE.
Page 795 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control 7.1.4.1 Setting the Device Address The GPIB address (primary address) of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually in the System – [Setup] > "Remote Settings" tab or via remote con- trol.
Page 796 ® Remote Control R&S Messages 7.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
Page 797 ® Remote Control R&S Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru- ment-control commands, error handling and the status registers.
Page 798 ® Remote Control R&S Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
Page 799 ® Remote Control R&S Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ;". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the TRIGger system and defines the trigger source (external trigger).
Page 800 ® Remote Control R&S Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 7.2.3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
Page 801 ® Remote Control R&S Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 7.2.3.2 Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.
Page 802 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts 7.2.3.6 Overview of Syntax Elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. The comma separates several parameters of a command.
Page 803 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>','< Meas Parameter> (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name>' Create or delete channel CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON | OFF Create or delete diagram area DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON | OFF Display trace in diagram area DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED...
Page 804 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating channel no. 1 with the default trace "Trc1". The trace is displayed in diagram area no. 1. CALC1:PAR:SDEF 'Trc2', 'S11'; DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'Trc2' Create a new trace named "Trc2", assigned to channel no. 1 (the suffix 1 after CALC, may be omitted), and display the trace.
Page 805 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Chapter 7.4, "Command Processing",...
Page 806 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is ignored) Table 7-3: Mixed commands Method...
Page 807 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.
Page 808 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Chapter 7.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 816). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set- tled.
Page 809 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI. The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received.
Page 810 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.
Page 811 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System SRE register The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR.
Page 812 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer. The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
Page 813 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
Page 814 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 7.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
Page 815 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning MSS bit (master status summary bit) This bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable reg- ister SRE.
Page 816 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC after all previous commands have been executed. Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instru- ment instead.
Page 817 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning INTegrity register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register and the associ- ated ENABle bit is set to 1. LIMit register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
Page 818 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System to the order of traces in the response string of the CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? query. ● The number of traces monitored cannot exceed 16. If a setup contains more traces, the newest traces are not monitored. STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity...
Page 819 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Receiver overload protection tripped This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive input level at one of the ports. If this condition persists, all internal and external generators are switched off. Reduce RF input level at the port.
Page 820 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Power settings exceed hardware limits This bit is set if the source power at one of the test ports is too high or too low. Reduce or increase the source power. Detector meas time has been internally limited This bit is set if the selected measurement time for a detector (observation time) is too long.
Page 821 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System As soon as all commands preceding *OPC have been completed, the instrument gen- erates an SRQ. Example: Generate an SRQ when a limit is exceeded 1. Set bit 3 in the SRE (summary bit of the STATus:QUEStionable register, set after STATus:PRESet) 2.
Page 822 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System 7.5.4.3 Parallel Poll In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0"...
Page 823 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry from the error queue. If no error mes- sages are stored there any more, the instrument responds with 0, "No error". The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers.
Page 824 ® Command Reference R&S Special Terms and Notation 8 Command Reference This chapter describes all common commands and SCPI commands implemented by the analyzer. Validity of the command set The commands reported in this chapter are valid for vector network analyzers with any number of ports.
Page 825 ® Command Reference R&S Special Terms and Notation 8.1.1 Upper/Lower Case Upper/lower case characters characterize the long and short form of the mnemonics in a command. The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters. It is recommended to use either the short form or the long form;...
Page 826 The Identification Query response is of the form Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA<Max. Freq>-<Ports>Port,<Order and Serial No.>,<FW_Version>, e.g. Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,1.50.1.42. The IDN information is editable; see "Define *IDN + *OPT..." on page 760. *IST? –...
Page 827 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Command Parameters / Remarks Short Description *OPT? – Queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed. The response consists of arbitrary ASCII response data according to OPTion identification query only IEEE 488.2.
Page 828 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ● MMEMory Commands..................1109 ● OUTPut Commands.................... 1152 ● PROGram Commands..................1157 ● [SENSe:] Commands..................1160 ● SOURce Commands...................1336 ● STATus Commands.................... 1401 ● SYSTem Commands...................1405 ● TRACe Commands..................... 1438 ● TRIGger Commands................... 1441 ●...
Page 829 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Data format The trace data is transferred in either ASCII or block data (REAL) format, depending on the setting. If block data format is used, it is recommended to FORMat[:DATA] select EOI as a receive terminator (SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]: RTERminator EOI).
Page 830 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Return values: <Data> Response values either in ASCII or block data format, depend- ing on the current setting. FORMat[:DATA] Example: Analogous to CALCulate:DATA:DALL?; see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA. Usage: Query only CALCulate:DATA:TRACe <TraceName>, <Format>, <Data>... The query gets the trace data of an arbitrary (not necessarily the active) trace, refer- enced by its trace name <TraceName>.
Page 831: Calculate:Data:call
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note ● Importing data is only supported in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>: CONTinuous OFF) ● Before importing data, the channel must be configured with the same settings that were used during export (user calibration, balanced port configuration, stimulus axis etc.).
Page 832: Calculate:Data:channel:all
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:ALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all traces of the selected channel. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
Page 833 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the previously defined S-parameter group. Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see on page 833. CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA <Format>, <Data>...
Page 834 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; SWE:POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points, making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1). CALC:DATA? FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace. In the FDATa setting, 20 comma-separated ASCII values are returned.
Page 835 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference MDATa Unformatted trace data (see SDATa) after evaluation of trace mathematics. [Data access point 5] TSData Raw measured values in pulse profile mode, only available for wave quantities and if pulse profile mode is active. The values correspond to the real output val- ues of the A/D converter;...
Page 836: Calculate:Data:nsweep[:Last]
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Tip: Use the generalized command to read or [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CDATa write error terms for arbitrary analyzer ports. For additional programming examples refer to Chapter 9.2.5.3, "Saving and Recalling Error Terms", on page 1517. CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep[:LAST]? <Format>, <RvCount> Reads the response values of a trace acquired in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF).
Page 837 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference This command can only be used for > 1. [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? <Format>, <FwCount>[, <FwCountEnd>] Reads the response values of a trace or a consecutive group of traces acquired in sin- gle sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF).
Page 838: Calculate:Data:stimulus
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:STIMulus? Reads the stimulus values of the active data or memory trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Usage: Query only 8.3.1.3 CALCulate:DLINe... The CALCulate:DLINe... commands control the horizontal line used to mark and retrieve response values (display line).
Page 839 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.4 CALCulate:DTIMe... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the skew measurement provided with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20..................839 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:DATA? ................839 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL? ............... 840 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP ................840 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:LIMit ................
Page 840 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Return values: <Boolean> 0 – skew check has passed 1 – skew check has failed Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K20 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on skew limit violations.
Page 841 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:POSition <SkewPos> Defines the position of the skew measurement. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <SkewPos> Skew position as integer percentage of the step size Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Skew Position"...
Page 842 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.5 CALCulate:EYE... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the eye diagram measurement provi- ded with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20...................843 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE .............843 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:POST<1|2> ............... 844 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE ................. 844 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:STATe ..............
Page 843 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ................859 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHOW ................860 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe ..............860 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE ............860 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance ..............861 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:DATA? ..............862 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:STATe ..........863 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:TTIMe:THReshold .................863 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:RMS ................863 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe ..................864 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STATe ...............864 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:ENCoder ..............864 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:LOWPass ..............865 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:SCRambler ..................
Page 844 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Cursor Settings" on page 696 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE <Weight> Sets the weight of the pre-cursor tap for the pre-emphasis FIR filter in the calculation chain of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 845: Calculate:Eye:equalization:ctle:pole<1|2
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <DC Gain> *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 701 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:CTLE:POLE<1|2> <CTLE Poles> Specifies the poles of the CTLE (a two-pole filter with single zero) used at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram.
Page 846: Calculate:Eye:equalization:state
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables the CTLE at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. The parameters of the equalizer (a two-pole filter with single zero) can be specified using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:CTLE:DC, CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:...
Page 847 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <DataRate> Data rate with units BPS, KBPS (=10^3 BPS), MBPS (=10^6 BPS), GBPS (=10^9 BPS) Default unit: BPS Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Symbol Rate"...
Page 848 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Length" on page 691 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:MODulation <PAMType> Defines or queries the modulation type of the signal to be simulated for the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 849 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <RiseTime> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Rise Time / Rise Time Definition" on page 692 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:THReshold <RiseThreshold> Selects the appropriate rise time definition for the low pass in the binary signal genera- tor simulation of the related eye diagram.
Page 850 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:DIRac:PROBability <DiracProbability> Defines the probability of the Dirac jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 851 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeriodicMagnitude> *RST: 1 ns Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Periodic" on page 698 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:PHASe <PeriodicPhase> Defines the phase of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.
Page 852 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe <Boolean> Activates the jitter functionality in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. The individual jitter sources can be selectively enabled using ●...
Page 853: Calculate:Eye:jitter:periodic:magnitude
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:PERiodic <Boolean> Enables/disables periodic jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Amplitude, frequency and phase of the jitter can be specified using CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:MAGNitude, CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:...
Page 854: Calculate:Eye:mask Auto
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Prior to enabling user-defined jitter, the jitter values must have been loaded from file using MMEMory:LOAD:EYE:JITTer.
Page 855: Calculate:Eye:mask:data
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <VerticalOffset> Vertical offset relative to the 0 V level, i.e. the Voltage level of the center. Default unit: V Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Center"...
Page 856: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Test On" on page 702 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL? Returns 'Pass' or 'Fail' to indicate the result of the limit check in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram, if the eye test is not enabled (CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK: ON), or if the mask is empty (see...
Page 857 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <FailCondition> SAMPles | RATE SAMPles: The eye mask test will fail if a configurable number of samples violate the mask (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:...
Page 858 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Width> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Top/Bottom Setup" on page 705 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:VERTical <Offset> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:VERTical <Offset> Defines the offset of the bottom/top rectangle in the mask of the related eye diagram. The offset is specified relative to the vertical center of the eye mask (see on page 854).
Page 859 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] width of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram. The geometric interpretation depends on the selected polygon type (see on page 858): CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 860: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail:condition
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Show Mask" on page 702 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe <Boolean> Defines whether the eye mask test shall be run after every recalculation of the related eye diagram.
Page 861: Calculate:Eye:measurement:data
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference This tolerance will only be used if CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:CONDition is set to SAMPles. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <ViolationTolerance> Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Test Settings" on page 706 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:DATA? Returns the measurement results of the related eye diagram (see "Eye Diagram...
Page 862: Calculate:Eye:measurement:state
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: For NRZ modulated generator signals CALCulate:EYE:MEASurement:DATA? returns something like 'Eye Measurements Eye Minimum,-102.344 mV, Eye Maximum,2.699 V, Eye Base,277.189 µV, Eye Top,2.597 V, Eye Mean,1.298 V, Eye Amplitude,2.596 V, Eye Height,2.596 V, Eye Width,10.000 ns, Bit Period,10.000 ns, Rise Time,115.000 ps,...
Page 863: Calculate:Eye:measurement:ttime:threshold
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Display Measurements" on page 688 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:TTIMe:THReshold <ThresholdEnum| LowerThreshold>[, <UpperThreshold>] Defines the lower and upper threshold that are used to calculate the transition times (rise/fall time) in an eye measurement. The thresholds can either be specified by enum constants for the standard 10–90% or 20–80% rise times, or numerically.
Page 864 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Active" on page 699 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STATe <Boolean> Defines whether the active trace in the selected channel shall be represented as an eye diagram.
Page 865 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference The low-pass is defined using its rise time (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut: on page 848) and rise time definition (see RTIMe:DATA CALCulate<Chn>:EYE: on page 849). INPut:RTIMe:THReshold This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
Page 866 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <EyeView> STIMulus | EMPHasis | JITTer | NOISe | DUT | EQUalization The rightmost building block that shall be part of the calculation chain STIMulus > EMPHasis > JITTer > NOISe > DUT > EQUali- zation.
Page 867 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns; STOP 3 Restrict the time gate to the time interval between 2 ns and 3 ns. CALCulate:FILTer:GATE:TIME:AOFFset ON Activate an offset of the time gate according to a new delay set- ting.
Page 868 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CenterTime> Center time of the time gate Range: -99.8999999 s to +99.8999999 s Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 1.5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON; :CALC:FILT:TIME: STAT ON Reset the instrument and enable the time domain representation and the time gate.
Page 869 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> MAXimum | WIDE | NORMal | MINimum MINimum - Steepest edges (rectangle) WIDE - Normal gate (Hann) NORM - Steep edges (Hamming) Maximum - Maximum flatness (Bohman) *RST: WIDE...
Page 870 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <StartTime> CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <StopTime> These commands define the start and stop times of the time gate, respectively. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StopTime> Start or stop time of the time gate. Range: -100 s to +99.999999999998 s (start time ) and -99.999999999998 s to +100 s (stop time)
Page 871 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:WINDow <TimeGate> Selects the time gate to be applied to the time domain transform. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | DCHebyshev RECT - steepest edges (rectangle) HANN - normal gate (Hann) HAMMing - steep edges (Hamming)
Page 872 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..............877 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer ..............877 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP ............878 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT ............878 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE ............878 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt ..............878 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN ..............879 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN[:STATe] ............879 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:ATTenuation ............879 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FREQuency ..............879 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe ............880 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:TRACe:COUPling CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:ATTenuation:BEHavior <AttenuationBehavior> Sets/gets the linear_2x batch mode parameter of the ISD tool: ●...
Page 873 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the cur- rent directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory) Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset " on page 626 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see...
Page 874 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE), this command loads the proper- ties of the Short coupon from a Touchstone file. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <String>...
Page 875 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Can only be set to ON, if a recent version of the ISD tool (from 2019-12 or later) is used. ON correspons to add_dc=1 in the tool's batch mode. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 876 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON, true) if the test fixture is connected to port <Ph_pt>, 0 (OFF, false) otherwise Example: Chapter 9.2.8, "Fixture Modeling", on page 1526 Manual operation: "Active" on page 628 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:FTIMe:DUT <FltDutAndLeadIns> is set to TRUE, this com- CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:FTIMe:OVERride mand allows to set the flight time for DUT + Lead-ins manually.
Page 877 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Operation (fast/acc)" on page 633 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PASSivity <Boolean> Defines whether the ISD tool shall enforce passivity and reciprocity for the test cou- pons and the test fixture. Corresponds to the passive batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 878 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt Tells the ISD tool which ports (in the measured DUT + Test Fixture file) shall be skip- ped when the tool is run. ● ...:LEFT: skip the ports on the left (according to the port order specified using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:ORDer) ●...
Page 879 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the deembedding files shall be assigned after the tool has run. Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number for single-ended deembedding, logical port number for balanced deembedding.
Page 880 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <FltLeadInScalingTime> Manual operation: "Scaling for Flt Tm" on page 632 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:TRACe:COUPling <TraceCoupling> Tells the ISD tool about coupling among lead-in traces. Corresponds to the coupling batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 881 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command starts the measurement of the coupon at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[: STATe]). The coupon type can be selected using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>: COUPon:TYPE. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 882 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON, true) if the test coupon is connected to port <Ph_pt>, 0 (OFF, false) otherwise Manual operation: "Active" on page 627 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DIFFcfg <SFDPortConfig> Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the 2x Thru test coupon. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 883 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN Runs the SFD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that: ● The test coupon measurement (using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>: COUPon:MEASure) finished successfully, or the test coupon data were success- fully loaded from file (using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon: MEASure:FILename ●...
Page 884 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT... Commands for Delta-L PCB characterization (see Chapter 5.7.15, "Delta-L 4.0 PCB Characterization", on page 239)..........884 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent? ......... 885 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent:COUNt? ..........885 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:DEFault? ........885 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:DEFault:COUNt? ..........886 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USEDefault ..........886 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER? ........886 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:COUNt? ..........887 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:ADD ........887...
Page 885: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Frequencies:current
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 649 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent:COUNt? Returns at how many frequencies the Delta-L algorithm calculates the loss-per-inch uncertainties. to query the list CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:CURRent? of frequencies. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 886: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Frequencies:user
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USEDefault <Boolean> Delta-L computes the uncertainty in the loss-per-inch calculation at specified frequen- cies. This command specifies whether to use the tool's default frequencies or custom fre- quencies, which can be defined using CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FRE commands.
Page 887: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Frequencies:user:delete:all
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 649 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:ADD <UserFrequencies> CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:DELete <Frequency> The Delta-L algorithm can calculate the loss-per-inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies: USEDefault). CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FREQuencies:USER:ADD|DELete adds/ deletes a frequency to|from the list of custom frequencies. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 888 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Clear All 1L Measurements/Clear Selected 1L Measure- ments" on page 652 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:SELected <String> If the 1-length method is used (CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:METHod M1L), the VNA firmware builds up a cache of coupon measurements (Touchstone files) in the DeltaL\1LMeasurementCache subfolder of the user data folder C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA.
Page 889: Calculate:fmodel:delt:M1L:measure
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Parameters: <Length> Length in inches Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Length" on page 652 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M2L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M3L:MEASure Measures the full set of S-parameters at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMO Del:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L|M2L|M3L[:STATe]).
Page 890 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference The one-length method (CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:METHod M1L) handles single-ended and balanced measurement results differently. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Parameters: <Measurement> SINGleended | BALanced SINGleended Single-ended or balanced analysis BALanced Balanced analysis Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Measurements"...
Page 891: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Run
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:RUN Runs the AITT-DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta-L settings. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Run" on page 652 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep:CONTrol <SweepControl> Tells the firmware to use either default values for frequency step size and IF band- width, or the settings of the active channel for the Delta-L measurement.
Page 892: Calculate:fmodel:delt:Sweep:control:ifbw
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Sweep Control" on page 649 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep:CONTrol:IFBW? For the Delta-L measurement, the firmware can either use a default IF bandwidth, or the active channel setting (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:SWEep: CONTrol). This query returns the resulting IF bandwidth. Suffix: <Ph_pt>...
Page 893 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Frequency> Frequency values The default MINimum frequency is the standard Delta-L start fre- quency of 10 MHz. The default MAXimum frequency is 20 GHz. Default unit: Hz Options: R&S ZNA-K231 Manual operation: "Sweep Frequency"...
Page 894 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the cur- rent directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory) Options: R&S ZNA-K210 Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset " on page 626 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean>...
Page 895 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference If checked (default), the tool generates the de-embedding file for side 1 / side 2. Suffix: <Ph_pt> <1|2> Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Create fixture deembedding data at the specified side (<1|2>) OFF (0) Do not create fixture deembedding data at the specified side (<1|2>) Options:...
Page 896 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ON (1) if a deembedding file shall be assinged to port <Ph_pt> OFF (0) otherwise Options: R&S ZNA-K210 Manual operation: "Apply" on page 629 More... CALCulate:FMODel:REName <Boolean> If set to ON (1), the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fixture"...
Page 897 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S . The trace becomes the active trace in channel 4. CALC4:FORM MLIN; :DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'CH4TR1' Calculate the magnitude of S and display it in a linearly scaled Cartesian diagram, assigning the trace number 2.
Page 898 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat:WQUType <Unit> Selects the physical unit of the displayed trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Unit> POWer | VOLTage Power or voltage units *RST: POWer Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'b1' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wave quantity b .
Page 899 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference The averaging mode can be selected using CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF | 1 | 0 *RST: Manual operation: "Reset History" on page 319 CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE <Mode>...
Page 900 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALC:FORM PHAS Reset the analyzer; assign the phase of the transmission param- eter S21 to the default trace. CALC:LDEV:AUTO ONCE Calculate correction factors and apply them to the default trace. CALC:LDEV:SLOP?; ELEN?; CONS? Query the values of the correction factors.
Page 901 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:MODE <Mode> Applies /discards the correction factors or re-calculates them for each trace (Tracking). Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <Mode> OFF | ON | TRACking Apply the correction using the latest correction factors. ON - Apply the correction using the latest correction factors.
Page 902 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ................905 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] ................906 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol:SHIFt ..................907 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA ................907 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] ................908 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar ................908 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DATA ............. 908 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DISPlay[:STATe] .................908 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DELete:ALL ................909 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DISPlay[:STATe] ..................909 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:FAIL? ................910 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer[:DATA] ................910 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer[:DATA] ................911 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:FEED ................911 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:FEED ................912 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt...
Page 903 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Limit Check" on page 397 CALCulate:LIMit:FAIL:DATA? <TraceName>, <LimitFailType> Returns those sweep points that have caused a limit violation of the given <LimitFail- Type> for trace <TraceName>. Query parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, uniquely identifying the related trace <LimitFailType>...
Page 904 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CenterX> Range: Virtually no restriction for center coordinates. *RST: Default unit: NN <CenterY> Range: Virtually no restriction for center coordinates. *RST: Default unit: NN <Radius> Range: Virtually no restriction for radius (use positive val- ues).
Page 905 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:SOUNd[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the acoustic signal (fail beep) on or off. The fail beep is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded circle limit. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 906: Calculate:Limit:control:shift
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StartStim> <StopStim> Pairs of stimulus values, each pair confining a limit line segment. See also Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 123.
Page 907: Calculate:Limit:data
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA <Type>, <StartStim>, <StopStim>, <StartResp>, <StopResp> Defines the limit line type, the stimulus and response values for a limit line with an arbi- trary number of limit line segments. See Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Defini- tion", on page 123.
Page 908: Calculate:Limit:dcircle:clear
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> If set to ON, only trace points within the display circle are shown at the GUI whenever the related trace is displayed in complex format. Manual operation: "Limit to Circle On/Off" on page 413 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar Resets the display circle to its default configuration (unit circle;...
Page 909: Calculate:Limit:fail
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 1.5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1.5 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response values of +2...
Page 910 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result. CALC:LIM:STAT:AREA LEFT, TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy, move the pass/fail message to the top left position.
Page 911 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference – creates upper limit line segments 2s+1, 2s+3, ..., 2k-1 with (type=upper and) the given response values – creates "missing" lower limit line segments 2s+2, 2s+4, ..., 2k with (type=lower and) default response values If s>0, newly created lower/upper limit line segments inherit their start and stop stimuli from the limit line segment with the highest even/odd number.
Page 912 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <StimulusOffset> Stimulus offset value, used to shift all imported limit line seg- ments in horizontal direction. Default unit: NN <ResponseOffset> Response offset value, used to shift all imported limit line seg- ments in vertical direction.
Page 913: Calculate:Limit:lower[:Data]
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:AMPLitude:STARt <Response> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:AMPLitude:STOP <Response> These commands change the start or the stop response values (i.e. the response val- ues assigned to the start or stop stimulus values) of a limit line segment. A segment must be created first to enable the commands (e.g CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA).
Page 914 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val- ues of +2 dB and +3 dB. CALC:LIM:SEGM:COUNT? Query the number of segments.
Page 915: Calculate:Limit:segment:Formula
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Seg> Segment number If you want to use a custom formula for a segment, use to create it. CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] Parameters: <State> OFF (0) The line segment is a straight line, connecting the endpoints specified in the segment definition.
Page 916 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <StimVal> Stimulus value confining the limit line segment. If specified, the unit of a stimulus value must in accordance with the sweep type of the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep: TYPE). Default units are Hz for frequency sweeps, dBm for power sweeps, and s for time sweeps.
Page 917 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:UPP 0, 0 Define an upper limit line segment across the entire sweep range, using a constant upper limit of 0 dBm. CALC:LIM:SEGM:TYPE LMIN Turn the defined limit line segment into a lower limit line seg- ment.
Page 918 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos> LEFT | MID | RIGHt Horizontal position <VerticalPos> TOP | MID | BOTTom Vertical position Example: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:FAIL? Manual operation: "Limit Check" on page 397 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] <Boolean>...
Page 919 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..............923 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold ............924 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold:STATe ..........924 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe] ........924 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA ................925 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:AOFF ................925 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth ............... 926 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:DELTa[:STATe] ..............927 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion ............927 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion:STATe ................ 927 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FORMat ..........928 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE ............929 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:CENTer ........
Page 920 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains traces Trc1 and Trc2, assigned to channels no. 1 and 2, respectively. :CALC2:PAR:SEL 'TRC2'; :CALC2:MARK1 ON; MARK2 Select Trc2 as the active trace of channel 2 and activate mark- ers 1 and 2 for it.
Page 921 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" on page 746 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer[:STATe]:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the marker info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined posi- tions in the active diagram. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 922 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference SCPI PHASe "Phase" POLar "Real Imag" COMPlex (for R&S ZVR compatibility) GDELay "Delay" REAL "Real" IMAGinary "Imag" "SWR" LINPhase "Lin Mag Phas"e MLPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) LOGPhase "dB Mag Phase" MDPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) IMPedance "R + j X"...
Page 923 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:SPECtrum For marker <Mk> of channel <Chn>'s active trace, this command does the following: ● Create a channel ● Set its center to marker <Mk>'s position ● Set its span to 10 times channel <Chn>'s BW ●...
Page 924: Calculate:Marker:mpeak:threshold
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference to activate it. CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold:STATe Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Value> Threshold value The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the threshold to a format-specific default value.
Page 925: Calculate:Marker:Aoff
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <HorizontalPos> LEFT | MID | RIGHt Horizontal position <VerticalPos> TOP | MID | BOTTom Vertical position Example: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Manual operation: "Bandpass Ref to Max" on page 432 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:AOFF Removes all markers from all traces of the active recall set. The removed markers remember their properties (stimulus value, format, delta mode, number) when they are restored (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe]...
Page 926: Calculate:Marker:Delta[:State]
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Tip: To obtain the <Quality Factor (BW)> result from the bandfilter info field, calculate the ratio <Center> / <Bandwidth>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4.
Page 927: Calculate:Marker:Excursion
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Enables or disables the delta mode. *RST: Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK ON Create marker no. 1 and set it to the center of the sweep range. CALC:MARK:DELT ON Create a reference marker at the center of the sweep range and set marker 1 to delta mode.
Page 928: Calculate:Marker:Function:bwidth:mode
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <OutFormat> MLINear | MLOGarithmic | PHASe | POLar | GDELay | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | LINPhase | LOGPhase | IMPedance | ADMittance | DEFault | COMPlex | MDB | MLPHase | MDPHase | MIMPedance | PIMPedance | PADMittance | MADMittance | MPIMpedance | MPADmittance | INDX | NOISe DEFault means that the marker is formatted according to the...
Page 929: Calculate:Marker:Function:center
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:CENTer Sets the center of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the marker <Mk> on trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Example: *RST;...
Page 930: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user:show
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:SHOW <Boolean> Displays or hides range limit lines for the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe]. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - range limit lines on or off. *RST: Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER...
Page 931: Calculate:Marker:Function:execute
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <SearchMode> MAXimum | MINimum | RPEak | LPEak | NPEak | TARGet | LTARget | RTARget | BFILter | MMAXimum | MMINimum | SPRogress See list of parameters below. Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK ON Create marker M1 and assign it to trace no.
Page 932: Calculate:Marker:Function:span
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Max / Min" on page 421 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:SPAN Sets the sweep span of the sweep range equal to the absolute value of the first coordi- nate of the active delta marker <Mk> on trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 933: Calculate:Marker:Mode
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:MODE <Mode> Sets marker no. <Mk> to continuous or discrete mode. The marker doesn't have to be created before (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] ON), the mode can be assigned in advance. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...
Page 934 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence[:STATe] <Boolean> Creates the reference marker and assigns it to trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value. Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 935: Calculate:Marker:Name
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value. Parameters: <Mode> CONTinuous | DISCrete CONTinuous - marker can be positioned on any point of the trace, and its response values are obtained by interpolation.
Page 936 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Mode> NORMal | FIXed | ARBitrary See CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE. *RST: NORMal Example: CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK:REF:TYPE FIX Create the reference markerand display it in the center of the sweep range as a fixed marker. CALC:MARK:REF:X 1GHz Shift the marker horizontally.
Page 937: Calculate:Marker:Reference:x
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1 and that the sweep range for a frequency sweep starts at 1 GHz. CALC:MARK:REF ON Create the reference marker and display it in the center of the sweep range.
Page 938: Calculate:Marker:Search:format
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Number of an existing marker. If a bandfilter search or a multiple peak search is active, tracking recalculates the whole marker set for each sweep and hence this suffix is ignored. Parameters: <Boolean>...
Page 939 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <SearchFormat> MLINear | MLOGarithmic | PHASe | UPHase | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | DEFault Identifies the search format for the target value of the marker. See table above. *RST: DEFault Example: Suppose channel 1's selected trace is POLar and marker 1 isn't yet created...
Page 940 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARGet <TargetSearchVal> Defines the target value for the target search of marker no. <Mk>, which can be activa- ted using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute TARGet. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number.
Page 941 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number Parameters: <Active> Boolean Manual operation: "Threshold Settings" on page 426 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE <Mode> Sets the marker mode for the related marker. The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...
Page 942 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference *RST: NORMal CALC:MARK ON; :CALC:MARK:TYPE FIX Example: Create marker 1 and display it in the center of the sweep range as a fixed marker. CALC:MARK:X 1GHz Shift the marker horizontally. The response value remains fixed. Manual operation: "Marker Mode"...
Page 943 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1 and the sweep range for a frequency sweep starts at 1 GHz. CALC:MARK ON Create marker no. 1 and display it in the center of the sweep range.
Page 944 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.14 CALCulate:MATH... The CALCulate:MATH... commands permit processing of measured data in numeri- cal expression format. The operators are +, -, *, / and use of constants and data arrays are permitted............... 944 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine ..........944 CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine...
Page 945 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Type Complete List Description Operands <Trace name> | All traces and memory traces of the active recall set | activeTrc | Active trace | Mem[activeTrc] Active memory trace assigned to the active trace Constants e, pi | Constants |...
Page 946 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace 'Trc1' to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'. The memory trace is not dis- played. CALC:MATH:FUNC DIV Define a mathematical trace, dividing the raw complex data trace trace by the stored memory trace.
Page 947 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates trace math for unformatted and/or formatted trace data, i.e. the trace formulae defined via CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine and/or CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine, respec- tively. When trace math is active either for unformatted or formatted data, the resulting math- ematical trace is calculated and displayed instead of the active data trace.
Page 948 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; SWE:TYPE POW CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Trc1', 'a1' Reset the instrument, activate a power sweep, and select a wave quantity a for the trace Trc1. DISP:WIND:TRAC:FEED 'Trc1' Display the generated trace in the active window. CALC:MATH:SDEF 'StimVal';...
Page 949 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Usage: Event Manual operation: "Delete All Mem" on page 361 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? Returns the trace names and measurement parameters of all traces assigned to a par- ticular channel. The result is a string containing a comma-separated list of trace names and measure- ment parameters, e.g.
Page 950 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note: Each channel can contain a single S-parameter group only. Defining a new S- parameter group deletes the previous one. Use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter: on page 952 to delete the current S-group explicitly. DELete:SGRoup Suffix: <Ch>...
Page 951 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC2:PAR:DEF:SGR 1,2 Create channel 2 and four traces to measure the two-port S- parameters S . The traces are not displayed. DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S11' DISP:WIND:TRAC3:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S12' DISP:WIND:TRAC4:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S21' DISP:WIND:TRAC5:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S22' Display the four traces in the diagram no. 1. INIT2:CONT OFF;...
Page 952 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CALL Deletes all traces in channel no. <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete Usage: Event Manual operation: "Delete Trace" on page 353 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CMEMory Deletes all memory traces in channel <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Usage: Event...
Page 953 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, string variable, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in "Table Area" on page 355. Trace names must be unique across all channels and diagrams. <Result> Measurement parameter (string variable); see Table 8-4.
Page 954 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note: To display the trace defined via CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine, cre- ate a diagram (DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] ON) and assign the trace to this diagram (DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED); see example below. changes the measurement result of an CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure existing trace. To select an existing trace as the active trace, use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter: SELect.
Page 955 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 'SCD11' | ... S-parameters involving balanced ports must be specified in the form S<m_i><m_j><j>, where <m_i> and <m_j> denote the port modes of the related logical ports and <j>. In general, for the port modes <m_i><m_j> all pairs of D (differential, balanced), C (common, balanced) and S (single- ended, unbalanced) are allowed.
Page 956 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 'B2D1/A1D1' | ... 'B02D01/A01D01' | ... Ratios of wave quantities with drive ports ... | 'B2D1/A1D1SAM' | 'B2D1/A1D1AVG' 'B2D1/ The strings SAM, AVG, AMP appended to the wave quantities denote a nor- A1D1AMP' | ... mal (sample, SAM), AVG Real Imag (AVG), or AVG Mag Phase (AMP) detector.
Page 957 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 'NF12' | 'NF13' | ... | 'NF21' | 'NF23' | ... Noise figure parameters NF<out><in>, where <out> and <in> denote the output and input port numbers of the DUT, and <out>≠<in>. Requires option R&S ZNA-K30. 'b1/a2(P2)' | 'b1/a3(P3)' | ...
Page 958 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in "Table Area" on page 355. Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S .
Page 959 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ............... 959 CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] ..................959 CALCulate:RIPPle:FAIL:ALL? ..................959 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar ..............960 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain ..................960 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA ................961 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DELete:ALL ............... 962 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] ..................962 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? ..............962 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat ..............963 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent:COUNt? ............963 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] ............... 964 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit ............964 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult? ..........965 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........965 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP ................966 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SOUNd[:STATe]...
Page 960 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Clear Test" on page 407 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain <SweepType> Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical units of the stimu- lus values of the ripple limit lines. The unit of the ripple limit is defined via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat.
Page 961 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter list in the format <Type>, <StartStimulus>, <StopSti- mulus>, <RippleLimit>[, {<Type>, <StartStimulus>, <StopStimu- lus>, <RippleLimit>}], where: <Type> – Boolean identifier for the ripple limit range type. 1 for ripple limit range on (with limit check). 0 for ripple limit range off: The range is defined, but no limit check result displayed.
Page 962 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides all ripple limit lines (including all ranges) associated to the active trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - ripple limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST;...
Page 963 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <UnitRef> COMPlex | MAGNitude | PHASe | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | GDELay | L | C Keyword for the physical unit of the response values; dimension- less numerss, relative power, phase, time, inductance, capaci- tance units.
Page 964 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit check on or off. A result is available even if the limit check is disabled; see example for CALCulate<Chn>: RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult?. *RST: n/a (no ripple limit line defined after a reset) Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus: STARt...
Page 965 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note: In remote control, the ripple limit check result is calculated once at the end of each sweep. If the ripple limits are changed, a new sweep is required to obtain upda- ted ripple limit check results. In single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF), the new sweep must be started explicitly.
Page 966 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:SEGM:STIM:STAR 1GHZ; STOP 2.5 GHZ; : CALC:RIPP:SEGM:LIM 5 Change the range to a stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2.5 GHz and a limit of 5 dB.
Page 967 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos> LEFT | MID | RIGHt Horizontal position <VerticalPos> TOP | MID | BOTTom Vertical position Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? Manual operation: "Ripple Check" on page 405 8.3.1.18 CALCulate:SMOothing...
Page 968 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:SMO ON Activate smoothing for the default trace. CALC:SMO:APER 0.5 Reduce the smoothing aperture to 0.5 %. Manual operation: "Aperture" on page 383 8.3.1.19 CALCulate:STATistics... The CALCulate:STATistics... commands evaluate and display statistical and phase information of the trace.
Page 969: Calculate:Statistics[:State]
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:MMPT ON Reset the instrument, hiding all statistical results. Display the "Min/Max/Peak-Peak" results. CALC:STAT:MSTD ON Display the "Mean/Std Dev" results in addition. CALC:STAT:RMS ON Display the "RMS"...
Page 970 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <EvalRange> Number of the evaluation range. Range: 1 to 10. In addition, 0 denotes the (non-configura- ble) "Full Span" evaluation range. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:DOM:USER? Query the default evaluation range. The response is zero, i.e. the evaluation range is equal to the complete sweep range CALC:STAT:DOM:USER 1 CALC:STAT:DOM:USER:STARt 1GHZ;...
Page 971: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user:show
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "Phase/El Length" results, the "Min/Max/Peak- Peak" results, and the "Mean/Std Dev" results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 972: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rdomain:user
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 378 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe <PhaseValue> Defines the compression value x for the compression point measurement for phase formatted traces. to retrieve the CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? compression results.
Page 973: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rlevel
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – reference range limit lines on or off. *RST: Manual operation: "Ref. Range" on page 379 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt <Start> Defines the start value of the range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics: NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER.
Page 974: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rphase
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference RANGe – uses the average value in a configurable reference range as the reference value (see CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER) *RST: FPOint Manual operation: "Reference Value" on page 379 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? Returns the compression point of an S-parameter or ratio measured in a power sweep. For dB formatted traces, the compression value x is set via CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel, for phase formatted traces it is set via...
Page 975 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Level> Reference level *RST: 1 dB Default unit: dB Manual operation: "Defined Value" on page 380 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RMARker <Marker> Allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small sig- nal value") for the compression point calculation.
Page 976: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp[:State]
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference For dB formatted traces, the reference level can be set using CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Phase> Reference phase *RST: 1° Default unit: deg Manual operation: "Defined Value"...
Page 977: Calculate:Statistics:rms[:State]
® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference SLOPe - return the slope (difference) between two marker val- ues. FLATness - return the flatness of the trace between two marker positions. ALL - return all statistical values, observing the order used above.
Page 978 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Boolean> Compensate imbalance of a waves (see "Imbalance Compensa- tion of a Waves" on page 224) Use the actual a-waves, depending on the imbalance parame- ters *RST: Example: SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:LPORt on page 1397 Options:...
Page 979 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..............985 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus ...............985 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP ..............986 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow ...............986 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:COMPlex <Result> Converts S-parameters into converted (matched-circuit) Y-parameters or Z-parameters and vice versa, assuming that port no. i is terminated with Z so that the three parame- ter sets are equivalent and the following formulas apply: Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 980 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]PORT<PhyPt>:ZREFerence Manual operation: "Renormalization According to Theory of" on page 280 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] <TransformType> Selects the time domain transformation type. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TransformType> BPASs | LPASs BPASs - band pass impulse (only impulse response;...
Page 981 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 446 Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME: DISTance), then the center value is entered in m; the range and default value XAXis changes accordingly.
Page 982 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam <DCValue> Defines the DC value for low pass transforms. The command is enabled only if the sweep points are on a harmonic grid (to be set explicitly or using CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:TIME:LPASs). Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 983 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam Manual operation: "DC Value" on page 372 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:EXTRapolate Extrapolates the measured trace towards f = 0 and overwrites the current DC value (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam). The command is rele- vant for low pass time domain transforms. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 984 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN Defines the time span of the diagram in time domain. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: Time span of the diagram in time domain. Range: 2E-012 s to 200 s.
Page 985 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON - time domain representation active. OFF - frequency domain representation active. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT? Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and query whether the default trace is displayed in the time domain.
Page 986 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME: DISTance), then the stop value is entered in m; the range and default value XAXis changes accordingly. CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow <WindowType> Selects the window type for filtering the data in the frequency domain prior to the time domain transformation.
Page 987 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..............987 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DEFine ..............988 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete ..............988 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect ..............988 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer ..............988 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SPAN ............989 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:COUNt? ........... 989 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:DATA<FaultNo> ............990 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:STATe ..........990 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold ..............991 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:POINts ..............991 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt ..............
Page 988 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Table 8-5: Example: frequency-dependent attenuation table Frequency Attenuation 1 GHz 0.01 dB/m 2 GHz 0.015 dB/m 3 GHz 0.012 dB/m CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete <DtfDeleteCable> Deletes the user-defined cable type with the given name. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number This suffix is ignored: cable types are defined for (and deleted from) all channels.
Page 989 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference See also CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:DTFault:STOP. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <Center>/ Center/span value. Default unit: m Example: :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer 2; SPAN 2 Defines the DtF distance window of the active trace of channel 1 via its center (2m) and span (2m).
Page 990 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:COUNt? returns 3, then CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:DATA1; DATA2; DATA3 returns the coordinates of the DtF limit violation peaks. Options: R&S ZNA-K2 Manual operation: "Fault Table" on page 718 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:STATe <DtfPeakState> If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace, this command allows to enable/disable DtF limit checking.
Page 991 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:POINts If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace, this command starts the "Auto Number of Points" calculation (see "Auto Number of Points" on page 713). An execution error is raised, if the calculated number of points is higher than the maxi- mum number of sweep points the firmware allows (100001).
Page 992 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNA-K2 Manual operation: "Start Distance / Stop Distance" on page 713 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe <DtfState> If channel <Chn> is performing an unsegmented frequency sweep, this command allows to transform its active trace into a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace. Suffix: <Chn>...
Page 993 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SLST Shunt L, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data SCST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data CSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSC Serial Ls, shunt C CSSC Serial Cs, shunt C LSSL Serial Ls, shunt L SLCS...
Page 994 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SCCS Shunt C, serial Cs SLLS Shunt L, serial Ls STSG Serial Touchstone (.s2p) data, shunt C SGST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data GSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSG Serial Ls, shunt C GSSG...
Page 995 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SGLS Shunt C, serial Ls SGGS Shunt C, serial Cs Table 8-7: Circuit models for single ended port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, generic 2-port (no circuit model) Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C...
Page 996 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Shunt C, serial L Shunt C, serial C Shunt L, serial L SHLC Shunt L, shunt C Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C Shunt C, serial L User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 997 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial C Table 8-8: Circuit models for ground loop port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, no circuit model Shunt L Shunt C Shunt C User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
Page 998 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Table 8-9: Circuit models for differential match embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, generic 2-port (no circuit model) SHLC Shunt L, shunt C ..1000 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ..................1000 PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ...................
Page 999 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..1013 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition ....1013 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>[:STATe] ..1013 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>:PARameters:C ... 1014 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>:PARameters:G ..1015 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>:PARameters:L ..1015 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>:PARameters:R ..1016 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>:TNDefinition ....1017 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>[:STATe] ..1017 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>:PARameters:C ..1018 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>:PARameters:G ..1018 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>:PARameters:L ..1019 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>:PARameters:R ... 1020 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>:TNDefinition ..........1020 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:GROup ..........
Page 1000 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ..................1035 PARameters:R<Cmp> ..1036 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>:TNDefinition ....1036 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:PARameters: ........................1036 DATA CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:PARameters: ......................1037 C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:PARameters: ......................1038 G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:PARameters: ......................1039 L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:PARameters: ......................1039 R<Cmp> ..1040 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:TNDefinition ............1040 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:WAVes CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>[: STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the deembedding function for balanced ports. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while deembedding is enabled.

This manual is also suitable for:

Zna43 Zna50 Zna67

R&S ZNA26 User Manual

Table of Contents

Format[:Data]

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Usage

Table of Contents

Example

Table of Contents

Example

(Instrument:nselect

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for R&S ZNA26

Summary of Contents for R&S ZNA26

This manual is also suitable for:

Table of Contents